2005 Nissan Maxima Owner Manual

User Manual: 2005-Nissan-Maxima

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 288 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2005 Nissan Maxima
OM5E-0A34U1
Table of Contents

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide” explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have any

questions, they will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-

er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity

with controls and maintenance requirements, as-

sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and complete trip for

you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Preteen

children should be seated in the rear

seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this owner’s manual for

important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability, and

may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from

modifications may not be covered un-

der NISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

This manual includes information for all options

available on this model. Therefore, you may find

some information that does not apply to your

vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design without notice and with-

out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

GARDENA, CALIFORNIA

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar-

dena, California.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to

produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical

transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a suc-

cessful worldwide company that manufactures cars

and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes them

in 170 nations.

NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured

by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in

Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world-

wide, collectively growing to become the fifth largest

automaker in the world. In addition to cars and

trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks, marine

engines, boats and other diversified products.

NISSAN has made a substantial and growing in-

vestment in North America. NISSAN’s commitment

is over $6 billion dollars in capital investments in

facilities across the continent. Some of the facilities

include the Nissan Manufacturing facilities in Can-

ton, Mississippi and in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle

styling design at Nissan Design America, Inc. in San

Diego, California, and engineering at Nissan Tech-

nical Center North America in Farmington Hills,

Michigan. Additionally, NISSAN employs more than

21,000 people throughout the United States,

Canada, and Mexico. An additional 60,000 people

work for the 1,250 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers

across North America.

NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the

Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its suppli-

ers and over 150 dealers employ approximately

4,500 people. These include company employees

and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across Canada.

In addition, many Canadians work for companies

that supply NISSAN and NISSAN dealers with ma-

terials and services ranging from the operation of

port facilities and transportation services, to the

supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and com-

puters in automobiles, and has led the industry in

improving both performance and fuel efficiency

through new engine designs and the use of syn-

thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The com-

pany has also developed ways to build quality into its

vehicles at each stage of the production process,

both through extensive use of automation and —

most importantly — through an awareness that

people are the central element in quality control.

From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers

until you took delivery of your new NISSAN, dozens

of checks were made to ensure that only the best job

was being done in producing and delivering your

vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to ensure that

when you take your NISSAN to your dealer for

maintenance, the service technician will perform his

work according to the quality standards that have

been established by NISSAN.

Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As you

know, seat belts are an integral part of the safety

systems that will help protect you and your passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

We urge you to use the seat belts every time you

drive the vehicle.

The NISSAN story of growth and achievement re-

flects our major goal: to provide you, our customer,

with a vehicle that is built with quality and craftsman-

ship — a product that we can be proud to build and

you can be proud to own.

WFW0002

WELCOME TO THE WORLD OF NISSAN

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 191

Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints ...............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations ................0-8

Warning/indicator lights ............................0-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P. 1-35)

2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag (P. 1-35)

3. Supplemental side impact air bag

(P. 1-35)

4. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-48)

5. Front seat belts (P. 1-10)

6. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)

7. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-26)

8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-25)

9. Seats (P. 1-2)

10. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9)

11. Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)

12. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P.1-42)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0046

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Engine hood (P. 3-9)

2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-19)

3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-18)

5. Windshield (P. 8-19)

6. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)

7. Power windows (P. 2-36)

8. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)

9. Mirrors (P. 3-16)

10. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)

11. Flat tire (P. 6-2)

12. Tire chains (P. 8-37)

13. Cornering light (P. 2-19)

14. Fog light switch (P. 2-19)

15. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0002

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-19)

2. Rear sun shade (if so equipped)

(P. 2-40)

3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-11)

4. Trunk lid (P. 3-9)

5. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)

6. Tie-down/towing hook (P. 6-12)

7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)

8. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-12, P. 9-3)

9. Fuel filler lid (P. 3-12)

10. Child safety locks (P. 3-5)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

LII0003

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(P. 3-16)

2. Interior lights, illuminated entry

(P. 2-41, P. 2-19)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-15)

4. Glove box (P. 2-32)

5. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)

6. Front seat (P. 1-2)

7. Rear console (P. 2-33)

8. Rear seat (P. 1-6)

9. Rear cup holders (P. 2-30)

10. Front console (P. 2-32)

11. Front cup holders (P. 2-30)

12. Park brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-12, P. 5-16)

13. HomeLinkT(P. 2-43)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

WII0011

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-19)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

3. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-18)

4. Center and side ventilators (P. 4-16)

5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14)

6. Display screen/Navigation system*

(P. 4-2, P. 4-7)

7. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43)

8. Audio system controls (P. 4-20)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-17)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-35)

11. Glove box (P. 2-32)

12. Power outlet/cigarette lighter

(accessory) (P.2-28)

13. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 2-24)

14. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 2-24)

15. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-35, P. 2-24)

16. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-13)

17. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-32)

WIC0753

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

18. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) or Traction

control system (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-27, P. 2-26)

19. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-26)

20. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)

22. Heated seat switches (if so equipped)

(P. 2-25)

23. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-40)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)

3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

(P. 8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)

6. Battery (P. 8-13)

7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)

8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)

(P. 8-11)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)

10. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)

11. Fuse block (P. 8-21)

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

13. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI0330

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—skoniecz

Warning

light Name Page

Anti-lock brake

warning light 2-9

Automatic

transmission

check warning

light (if so

equipped)

2-10

Brake warning

light 2-10

Charge warning

light 2-10

Door open

warning light 2-10

Warning

light Name Page

Engine oil pres-

sure light 2-10

Low fuel warn-

ing light 2-11

Low windshield

washer fluid

warning light

2-11

Seat belt warn-

ing light and

chime

2-11

Supplemental

air bag warning

light

2-11

Trunk lid open

warning light 2-11

Indicator

light Name Page

Automatic

transmission

position indica-

tor light (A/T

models)

2-12

CRUISE main

switch indicator

light

2-12

Cruise SET

switch indicator

light

2-12

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-12

High beam in-

dicator light

(blue)

2-12

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Indicator

light Name Page

Malfunction

indicator lamp

(MIL)

2-12

Slip indicator

light (if so

equipped)

2-13

Traction control

system off indi-

cator light (if

so equipped)

2-13

Turn

signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-13

Vehicle dy-

namic control

off indicator

light (if so

equipped)

2-13

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment —

passenger side.................................1-2

Front power seat adjustment

(for driver’s seat and if so equipped for

passenger’s seat) ..............................1-4

Folding rear seat (if so equipped).................1-6

Head restraint adjustment .......................1-8

Active head restraint (front seats).................1-9

Seat belts .......................................1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-10

Child safety...................................1-12

Pregnant women ..............................1-14

Injured persons................................1-14

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-14

Seat belt extenders ............................1-17

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-17

Child restraints...................................1-18

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-18

Child restraint installation on rear seat center

(5-passenger models only) or outboard

positions .....................................1-20

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system..............................1-25

Top tether strap child restraint ..................1-26

Child restraint installation on front passenger

seat..........................................1-27

Booster seats ....................................1-31

Precautions on booster seats ...................1-31

Supplemental restraint system .....................1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................1-35

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-49

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-49

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat properly. See

“Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later

in this section.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER SIDE

WARNING

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-

clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-

hicle is stopped.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to

make sure it is securely locked.

LRS0244 LRS0245

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and if

so equipped for passenger’s seat)

WARNING

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”

in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”for auto-

matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later

in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-

clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-

hicle is stopped.

WRS0163

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat

cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver. Move the lever up or down

(manual) or move the switch forward or backward

(power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0164 Manual

LRS0239

Power

LRS0238

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so

equipped)

Interior trunk access

For models without rear center console, the trunk

can be accessed from the passenger side of the

rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

1Push down on the button on the rear parcel

shelf.

2Fold down the passenger side seatback.

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper restraints

could result in serious injury in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●The 4-passenger model has seating and

seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front

seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use

the rear console as a seating position or

for a child restraint.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

LRS0246

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach

through the opening and pull on the strap s

located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the master

key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key

cannot be used to lock or unlock the release

button.

For models with rear center console, the trunk

can be accessed through the access panel be-

tween the rear seats.

The panel can be locked using the master key to

prevent unauthorized access. The valet key can-

not be used to lock or unlock the access panel.

For more information on keys, refer to ”Keys” in

the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section

of this manual.

Center armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

LRS0247 LIC0431 LIC0401

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,

push and hold the lock knob and push the head

restraint down.

To adjust the head restraint forward or backward

(Type A only), push it in the direction required.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-

erly as they may provide significant pro-

tection against injury in an accident. Do

not remove them. Check the adjustment

after someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

Type A — Front

LRS0241

Type B — Rear

LRS0240 WRS0134

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front

seats)

WARNING

●Always adjust the head restraints prop-

erly as specified in the previous section.

Failure to do so can reduce the effec-

tiveness of the active head restraint.

●Active head restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Al-

ways wear seat belts. No system can

prevent all injuries in any accident.

●Do not attach anything to the head re-

straint stalks. Doing so could impair

active head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing the

force that the seatback receives from the occu-

pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the

head restraint helps support the occupant’s head

by reducing its backward movement and helping

absorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-

lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-

scribed earlier in this section.

SPA1025

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat, your chances of being injured or killed

in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be

greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages

you and all of your passengers to buckle up every

time you drive, even if your seating position in-

cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be worn

at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur

if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●The 4-passenger model has seating and

seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front

seats and 2 in the rear seats.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has

activated, it cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

See your NISSAN dealer.

●Removal and installation of the pre-

tensioner seat belt system components

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any collision

by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear facing child restraint

●Front facing child restraint

●Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear

facing child restraints. Front facing child re-

straints are available for children who outgrow

rear facing child restraints and are at least one

year old. Booster seats are used to help position

a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-

tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-

straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional protec-

tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

later in this section.

Infants

Infants up to at least one year old should be

placed in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN

recommends that infants be placed in child re-

straints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a child

restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for installation

and use.

Small Children

Children that are over one year old and weigh

between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be

placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to

the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommendations.

NISSAN recommends that small children be

placed in child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose

a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat belts

which are provided. The seat belt may not fit

properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches

(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18

kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be

used to obtain proper seat belt fit.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—tbrooks

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially available booster seat if the shoul-

der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to

the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat

belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat

should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is

properly positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the

hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat belt.

The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child

has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or

near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt

without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

areas while the vehicle is moving. The

child could be seriously injured or killed in

an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as pos-

sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the

shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your

chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—tbrooks

2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the seat belt to

move, and allows you some freedom of

movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have a locking

mechanism for child restraint installation. It is

referred to as the automatic locking mode or child

restraint mode.

When automatic locking mechanism is activated

the seat belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in

the emergency locking mode. See “Child re-

straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should be

used only for child restraint installation.

During normal seat belt use by a passen-

ger, the locking mode should not be acti-

vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-

fortable seat belt tension. It can also

change the operation of the front passen-

ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they are

not completely secured, passengers may

be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—tbrooks

Unfastening the seat belts

1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on

the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-

tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows.

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about seat belt opera-

tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s

1and

move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired

position s

2, so the belt passes over the center of

the shoulder. The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-

der belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available which is

compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a sud-

den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint can re-

sult in serious injury or death.

WARNING

●Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

●Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An inflating

supplemental front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be used

in the rear seat.

●NISSAN recommends that the child re-

straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

●An improperly installed child restraint

could lead to serious injury or death in

an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a

universal child restraint lower anchor system, re-

ferred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-

straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted

attachments that can be connected to these

lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem” later in this section.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Child restraints for infants and small children of

various sizes are offered by several manufactur-

ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the

following points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

WARNING

●Improper use of a child restraint can

increase the risk or severity of injury for

both the child and other occupants of

the vehicle.

●Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a child re-

straint, be sure to select one which will

fit your child and vehicle. It may not be

possible to properly install some types

of child restraints in your vehicle.

●If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being in-

jured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the child restraint, but as

upright as possible.

●After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the belt holds the

restraint in place. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25

mm). If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the belt as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again.

●If you must install a front facing child

restraint in the front seat, see “Child

restraint installation on front passenger

seat” later in this section.

●When your child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in

case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the child

restraint.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON REAR SEAT CENTER

(5-passenger models only) OR

OUTBOARD POSITIONS

WARNING

●The three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an automatic locking

mode retractor which must be used

when installing a child restraint.

●Failure to use the retractor’s locking

mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The re-

straint could tip over or otherwise be

unsecured and cause injury to the child

in a sudden stop or collision.

●The 4-passenger model has seating and

seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front

seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use

the rear console as a seating position or

for a child restraint.

Front facing

When you install a child restraint in the rear seat,

follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions. The back of the child restraint

should be secured against the vehicle seat

back. If necessary, adjust or remove the

head restraint to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment”

earlier in this section. If the head restraint is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to install the head restraint when the child

restraint is removed. If the seating position

does not have an adjustable head restraint

and it is interfering with the proper child

restraint fit, try another seating position or a

different child restraint.

Front Facing (outboard) — step 1

LRS0412

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode). It reverts back to

emergency locking mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

Front Facing (center for 5-passenger mod-

els only) — step 1

LRS0413

Front Facing — step 2

WRS0250

Front Facing — step 3

LRS0458

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to push the child restraint from

side to side, and tug it forward to make sure

that it is securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again

on the shoulder belt to further tighten the

child restraint. If unable to properly secure

the restraint move the restraint to another

seating position and try again , or try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor, the

retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Front Facing — step 4

LRS0457

Front Facing — step 5

WRS0252

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Rear facing

When you install a child restraint in the rear seat,

follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1

LRS0406

Rear Facing (center for 5-passenger mod-

els only) — step 1

LRS0407

Rear Facing — step 2

LRS0408

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—skoniecz

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-

gency locking mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to push the child restraint from

side to side, and tug it forward to make sure

that it is securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again

on the shoulder belt to further tighten the

child restraint. If unable to properly secure

the restraint move the restraint to another

seating position and try again , or try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

Rear Facing — step 3

LRS0409

Rear Facing — step 4

LRS0410

Rear Facing — step 5

LRS0411

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more seat belt webbing out of the retractor,

the retractor is in the automatic locking

mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the belt

is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

WARNING

●Attach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown. If

a child restraint is not secured properly,

your child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident.

●Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH system anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

●The LATCH system anchors are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstance are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to two anchors located at certain seating

positions in your vehicle. This system is known as

the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren) system. This system may also be referred to

as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.

With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle

seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle

is equipped with special anchor points that are

used with LATCH system compatible child re-

straints. Check your child restraint for a label

stating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys-

tem. This information may also be in the child

restraint owner’s manual. If you have such a child

restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating

positions equipped with LATCH system anchors

which can be used to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at the

rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A

label is attached to the seatback to help you

locate the LATCH system anchors.

WRS0440

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

LATCH child restraints generally require the use

of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child

restraint” later in this section for installation in-

structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compatible

child restraint to the lower anchor attachments,

follow these steps:

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area

and feeling to make sure there are no

obstructions over the LATCH system an-

chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat

cushion material. The child restraint will

not be secured properly if the LATCH sys-

tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatible

child restraint, insert the child restraint

LATCH system anchor attachments into the

anchor points on the seat. If the child re-

straint is equipped with a top tether, see

“Top tether strap child restraint” later in this

section for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and before

placing the child in it, use force to push the

child restraint from side to side and tug it

forward to make sure that the child restraint

is securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

WARNING

●Child restraint anchor points are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

5-passenger models

LRS0243

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●After removing a rear seat head re-

straint for top tether installation, store

it securely to prevent it from causing

injury to passengers or damage to the

vehicle in case of sudden braking or an

accident. Always replace it and adjust

properly when top tether is no longer in

use.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must

be secured to the anchor point provided behind

its position.

First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat

belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions),

as applicable.

Remove the head restraint from the seat back.

Store it in a secure place. Flip up the anchor

cover for the anchor point which is located di-

rectly behind the child seat. Position the top

tether strap over the top of the seat back s

1and

secure it to the tether anchor bracket that pro-

vides the straightest installation. Tighten the

tether strap according to the manufacturer’s in-

structions to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint

installation instructions in this section and the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf

finisher.

If you have any questions when installing a

top strap child restraint on the rear seat,

consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

●Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat.

Supplemental front air bags inflate with

great force. A rear-facing child restraint

could be struck by the supplemental

front air bag in a crash and could seri-

ously injure or kill your child.

4-passenger models

LRS0296 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●NISSAN recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front pas-

senger seat, move the passenger seat

to the rearmost position. Also, be sure

the front passenger air bag status light

is illuminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this sec-

tion for details.

●A child restraint with a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passen-

ger seat.

●The three-point seat belt in your vehicle

is equipped with an automatic locking

mode retractor which must be used

when installing a child restraint.

●Failure to use the retractor’s locking

mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The re-

straint could tip over or otherwise be

unsecured and cause injury to the child

in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. See “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this

section.

If you must install a child restraint in the front seat,

follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-

senger seat. It should be placed in a

front-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the

head restraint to its highest position. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions. Child restraints for infants

must be used in the rear-facing direc-

tion and therefore must not be used in

the front seat.

WRS0378 Front Facing — step 1 WRS0379

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seat back. If

necessary, adjust or remove the head re-

straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.

See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in

this section. If the head restraint is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the child restraint is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-

gency locking mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

Front Facing — step 2

WRS0159

Front Facing — step 3

WRS0160

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to push the child restraint from

side to side, and tug it forward to make sure

that it is securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again

on the shoulder belt to further tighten the

child restraint. If unable to properly secure

the restraint move the restraint to another

seating position and try again , or try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt

out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any

more belt webbing out of the retractor, the

retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 6.

8. Turn the ignition to the ON position. The

passenger air bag status light should say

“OFF” . If this light is not illuminated it

may indicate a malfunction. Move the child

restraint to another seating position.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Front Facing — step 4

LRS0457

Front Facing — step 5

WRS0380

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS

WARNING

●Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while riding in the vehicle.

Failure to use a child restraint or

booster seat can result in serious injury

or death.

●Infants and small children should never

be carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The child

could be crushed between the adult and

parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the

same seat belt around both your child

and yourself.

●NISSAN recommends that the booster

seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

●A booster seat must only be installed in

a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a

three-point type seat belt with a

booster seat can result in a serious in-

jury in sudden stop or collision.

●An improperly installed booster seat

could lead to serious injury or death in

an accident.

WARNING

●Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster seat.

Items such as these may move during

normal driving or a collision and result

in serious injury or death. Booster seats

are designed to be used with a

lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-

signed to properly route the lap and

shoulder portions of the seat belt over

the strongest portions of a child’s body

to provide the maximum protection dur-

ing a collision.

LRS0455

BOOSTER SEATS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seat back must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s

1is chosen, the

vehicle seat back must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat s

2should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with your

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

WARNING

●Improper use of a booster seat can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury for

both the child and other occupants of

the vehicle.

●Follow all of the booster seat manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation and

use. When purchasing a booster seat,

be sure to select one which will fit your

child and vehicle. It may not be possible

to properly install some types of

booster seats in your vehicle.

●If the booster seat and seat belt is not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

●Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-

tioned to fit the booster seat, but as

upright as possible.

LRS0453 LRS0464

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt, make

sure the shoulder portion of the belt is

away from the child’s face and neck and

the lap portion of the belt does not

cross the abdomen.

●Do not put the shoulder belt behind the

child or under the child’s arm. If you

must install a booster seat in the front

seat, see “Booster seat installation on

front passenger seat” later in this

section.

●When your booster seat is not in use,

keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in

case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the booster

seat.

Booster seat installation on rear seat

center (5 – passenger models only) or

outboard positions

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-

matic locking mode when using a booster

seat with the seat belts. When you install a

booster seat in the rear seat follow these

steps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

Outboard position

LRS0452

Center position for 5–passenger models

only

LRS0451

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

2. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-

sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to

obtain the correct booster seat fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this

section. If the head restraint is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the booster seat is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

belt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in the “Three-point seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

Booster seat installation on front pas-

senger seat

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that child restraints

be installed in the rear seat. However, if

you must install a booster seat in the front

passenger seat, move the passenger seat

to the rearmost position.

If you must install a booster seat in the front seat,

follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-

sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to

obtain the correct booster seat fit. See

“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this

section. If the head restraint is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to install

the head restraint when the booster seat is

removed. If the seating position does not

have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

belt routing.

LRS0454

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in the “Three-point seat belt with

retractor” earlier in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the driver and passenger supplemental front air

bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),

supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact

air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:

The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system:

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front

passenger in certain side impact collisions. The

front seat supplemental side air bags are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

system: This system can help cushion the im-

pact force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain side

impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection pro-

vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-

ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for

instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—skoniecz

WARNING

●The supplemental front air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a

side impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity frontal collision. Also,

the front passenger air bag will not in-

flate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section.

Always wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

●The seat belts and the supplemental

front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat. The front air bags inflate with

great force. Even with the NISSAN ad-

vanced air bag system, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the supplemental

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

advanced air bag system monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt us-

age then inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

See “Front Passenger air bag and sta-

tus light” later in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the

supplemental front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the supplemental front air

bags, side air bags or curtain side-

impact air bags inflate if they are not

properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-

dren should be properly restrained in

the rear seat, if possible.

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating supplemental front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. See

“Child restraints” earlier in this section

for details.

ARS1045 WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag:

●The supplemental side air bag and cur-

tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a frontal im-

pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-

verity side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

WARNING

●The seat belts, the supplemental side

air bags and curtain side-impact air

bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the seat.

The side air bag and curtain side-impact

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg or

face near the side air bag on the side of

the seatback of the front seat or near

the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear out-

board seats to extend their hand out of

the window or lean against the door.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

SSS0101 SSS0188

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-

ules

2. SRS curtain side-impact air bags

3. Supplemental side air bag modules

4. Diagnosis sensor unit

5. Supplemental front air bag modules

6. Crash zone sensor

7. Occupant classification system control

unit

8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s

and passenger’s side

9. Occupant classification sensor

10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

11. Side satellite sensor

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-

vanced air bag system for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in

the center of the steering wheel. The passenger

supplemental front air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-

tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision are

similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.

They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental front air bag

system operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual

stage inflators. It also monitors information from

the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,

seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor) and passenger seat belt

WRS0466

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the

severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, it additionally

monitors the weight of an occupant or object on

the seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-

tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned OFF under

some conditions, depending on the weight de-

tected on the passenger seat and how the seat

belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated. See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section for further details. One

front air bag inflating does not indicate improper

performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a

fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the

release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to

not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-

ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of

seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants. They

can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.

However, an inflating front air bag may cause

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags

do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-

senger seated upright as far as practical away

from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The

supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some con-

ditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-

essary for most effective protection. Fail-

ure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

LRS0316

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light is

located on the dash next to the security light near

the windshield. The light operates as follows:

●Unoccupied passenger seat or when other

conditions are met as outlined in this sec-

tion: The illuminates to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is OFF and will

not inflate in a crash.

●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meets the conditions outlined in this

section: The light is OFF to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is opera-

tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used

to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor). It is in the bottom of the

front passenger seat cushion and is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the seat by

weight. It works together with seat belt sensors

described later. For example, if a child is in the

front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-

tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag

OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a

child restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s

weight can be detected and cause the air bag to

turn OFF. Weight sensor operation can vary de-

pending on the front passenger seat belt sen-

sors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-

signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the

amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when

it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint

mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected

by the weight sensor and the belt tension de-

tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag

system determines whether the front passenger

air bag should be automatically turned OFF as

required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the passen-

ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For

small adults it may be turned OFF. Also, if the

occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-

ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out

of position), this could cause the sensor to turn

the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant

improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic

locking mode (child restraint mode), this could

cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the weight

sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to

operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child re-

straints as required by the regulations. Failing to

properly secure child restraints and to use the

automatic locking mode (child restraint mode)

may allow the restraint to tip or move in an acci-

dent or sudden stop. This can also result in the

passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of

being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this

section for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied and

the seat belt is not buckled, the passenger air bag

is designed not to inflate in a crash. However,

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

heavy objects placed on the seat could result in

air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight

detected by the weight sensor. Other conditions

could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a

child is standing on the seat, or if two children are

on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-

tomatically turned OFF. The light will illuminate

(indicating the air bag is OFF and will not inflate)

when the front passenger seat is not occupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and the pas-

senger air bag status light is illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

or not using the seat belt properly. If a child

restraint must be used in the front seat, but the

status light is not lit (indicating that the air bag

might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. If

such situations happen, properly position and

restrain the occupant or child restraint. Other-

wise reposition the occupant or child restraint in

a rear seat.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-

tions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steering

wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-

tal front air bag inflates.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the supplemental front air bag system.

●Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and the

instrument panel assembly by placing

material over the steering wheel pad

and above the instrument panel or by

installing additional trim material

around the air bag system.

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classifica-

tion system (weight sensor).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal injury.

●Work on and around the supplemental

front air bag system should be done by

a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-

cal equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring should not

be modified or disconnected. Unautho-

rized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield could

affect the function of the supplemental

air bag system.

●The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-

ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side-impact air bag and

curtain side-impact air bags system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-

cated in the outside of the seatback of the front

seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags are located in the side roof rails. These

systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-

lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-

position occupants. However, all of the infor-

mation, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-

impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflate

if the forces in another type of collision are similar

to those of a higher severity side impact. They are

designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side

collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may

be heard, followed by release of smoke. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of

seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants.

Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in the front

and rear outboard seating positions. They can

help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag may cause abrasions or other

injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to

the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

LRS0259

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

practical away from the supplemental side air

bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as

far away as practical from the door finishers and

side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help

protect the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact

air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if

the occupant is too close to, or is against, these

air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-

tions.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if the supplemental side air

bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag system

components will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain side-impact

air bag system. This is to prevent acci-

dental inflation of the side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag or damage

to the side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag system.

●Tampering with the supplemental side

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial near the seatbacks or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, around the side air bag.

●Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag system

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

Installation of electrical equipment

should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and

guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front

seats)

WARNING

●The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be

reused after activation. It must be re-

placed together with the retractor and

buckle as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is

not activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if nec-

essary, replaced by your NISSAN

dealer.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This

is to prevent accidental activation of

the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage

to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.

Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Work around and on the pre-tensioner

system should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pre-tensioner seat

belt system.

●If you need to dispose of the pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner

disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.

Incorrect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system

activates in conjunction with the supplemental air

bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-

tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s

retractor. These seat belts are used the same as

conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,

smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,

load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the

chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner

system, the supplemental air bag warning

light will not come on, will flash intermit-

tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on

after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or

START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner

seat belt may not function properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt

system and guide the buyer to the appropriate

sections in this Owner’s Manual.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located

on the sun visors)

2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-

cated on the door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front air

bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle

as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-

tems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental

air bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor

unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air

bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-

impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts

and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or START

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-

tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental front

air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain

side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt

systems may not operate properly. It must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

WRS0169 LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag,

curtain side-impact air bag systems

and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems

will not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental

side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and

pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate

on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it

is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning

light remains illuminated after inflation has oc-

curred. Repair and replacement of these supple-

mental air bag systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-

mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air

bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts

should be pointed out to the person performing

the maintenance. The ignition key should always

be in the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag or curtain

side-impact air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, if any of

the supplemental front air bags inflate,

the activated pre-tensioner seat belts

must also be replaced. The air bag mod-

ule and pre-tensioner seat belt system

should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

The air bag module and pre-tensioner

seat belt system cannot be repaired.

●The supplemental front air bag, side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt

system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to

the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt

system or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental

air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-

tem disposal procedures are set forth in

the appropriate NISSAN Service

Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-5

Fuel gauge ....................................2-6

Compass display (if so equipped) ...................2-6

Zone variation change procedure.................2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......2-9

Checking bulbs ................................2-9

Warning lights .................................2-9

Indicator lights ................................2-12

Audible reminders .............................2-14

Security systems .................................2-14

Vehicle security system.........................2-14

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) ........2-16

Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-18

Switch operation ..............................2-18

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-19

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-19

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ...............2-19

Headlight control switch........................2-20

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-22

Instrument brightness control ...................2-22

Turn signal switch .............................2-23

Fog light switch ...............................2-23

Cornering light ................................2-23

Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-24

Horn ............................................2-24

Heated seats (if so equipped)......................2-25

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .............2-26

Traction control system (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) ..................................2-27

Power outlet .....................................2-27

Cigarette lighter ..................................2-28

Storage .........................................2-29

Map pockets..................................2-29

Seatback pockets .............................2-29

Sunglasses holder.............................2-30

Cup holders ..................................2-30

Glove box ....................................2-32

Console box ..................................2-32

Rear center console (if so equipped).............2-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Covered storage box (if so equipped)............2-34

Grocery hooks ................................2-34

Cargo nets ...................................2-35

Windows ........................................2-36

Power windows ...............................2-36

Skyview™ roof....................................2-38

Sunroof (if so equipped)...........................2-38

Automatic sunroof .............................2-38

Rear sun shade (if so equipped)....................2-40

Interior light ......................................2-41

Personal lights ...................................2-42

Front.........................................2-42

Rear .........................................2-43

Trunk light .......................................2-43

HomeLinkTuniversal transceiver ...................2-43

Programming HomeLinkT.......................2-44

Programming HomeLinkTfor Canadian

customers ....................................2-45

Operating the HomeLinkTuniversal

transceiver....................................2-45

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-46

Clearing the programmed information ............2-46

Reprogramming a single HomeLinkTbutton ......2-46

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-46

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-19)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

3. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-18)

4. Center and side ventilators (P. 4-16)

5. Security indicator light (P. 2-14)

6. Display screen/Navigation system*

(P. 4-2, P. 4-7)

7. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43)

8. Audio system controls (P. 4-20)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-17)

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-35)

11. Glove box (P. 2-32)

12. Power outlet/cigarette lighter

(accessory) (P. 2-27/P. 2-28)

13. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 2-24)

14. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 2-24)

15. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-35, P. 2-24)

16. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-13)

17. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(P. 4-32)

WIC0753

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

18. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) or Traction

control system (TCS) off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-27, P. 2-26)

19. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-26)

20. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17)

21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)

22. Heated seat switches (if so equipped)

(P. 2-25)

23. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-40)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-

theses for operating details.

1. Warning/indicator lights

2. Speedometer

3. Tachometer

4. Warning/indicator lights

5. Change button for trip odometer

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Odometer (total/twin trip)

8. Fuel gauge

LIC0381

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Speedometer

2. Odometer/twin trip display

3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed

when the ignition key is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the display

as follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-

ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

Elapsed time, driving distance and average

speed information is also available. Refer to

“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,

heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-

tion later in this manual.

LIC0382 LIC0432

2-4 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into

the red zone s

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause serious

engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range s

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency”section for immediate

action required.

LIC0383 LIC0384

Instruments and controls 2-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel filler lid is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as

possible. After a few driving trips,

the lamp should turn off. If the

lamp remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see “Mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL)” later in

this section. When the COMPASS switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the compass display s

1will indicate the

direction the vehicle is heading.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by

driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

LIC0385 LIC0422

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

2-6 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE

PROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will ap-

pear in the display.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration. Record the zone

number.

3. Press the COMPASS switch until the new

zone number appears in the display. After

you stop pressing the switch in, the display

will show a compass direction within a few

seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display turned on, push the COM-

PASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone

selection comes up (a number will be dis-

played in the mirror compass window).

2. Toggle until correct zone is found and re-

lease switch.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

3. The display will show all segments, and re-

turn to the normal compass mode within 10

seconds of no switch activity.

4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1

through 3. See map.

●If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjustment,

have the compass checked at an authorized

dealer.

●The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving up

or down a steep hill. (The compass returns

to the correct compass point when the ve-

hicle moves to an area where the geomag-

netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

2-8 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

or Anti-lock brake warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning light (if

so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (Blue)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Charge warning light Trunk lid open warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light

(A/T models only)

Traction control system off indicator light (if so

equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so

equipped)

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and turn the ignition key to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on:

, or , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on briefly

and then go off:

or , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock brake

warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-

lock function ceases, but the regular braking

system continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,

contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

Automatic transmission check

warning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light

comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes

on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic

transmission system is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

light comes on when the parking brake is applied,

and also warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake and clutch fluid”in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN

dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not

closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON

position.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not

designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

2-10 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause se-

rious damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Such damage is not covered by

warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-

nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E

(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge needle

reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield washer fluid

warning light

This light comes on when the windshield washer

fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid

as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition key is turned to the ON or START position

and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt

is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds

for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt

is securely fastened.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bags, supplemental side

air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre-

tensioner seat belt systems need servicing and

your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioner seat belts may not function properly.

For additional details see “Supplemental restraint

system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag,

curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so

equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt

systems will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or others,

have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not

securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON

position.

Instruments and controls 2-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmission posi-

tion indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-

tion, the indicator in the speedometer shows the

automatic transmission selector lever position.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator

light

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the light

blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

Front passenger air bag sta-

tus light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger seat

is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,

see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

air bags” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL)

If this indicator lamp comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also come on

steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or if

the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly,

and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4

liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lamp should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator lamp comes on steady for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when

the engine is not running, it indicates that the

vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-

ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in

one of two ways:

●Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If

the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The lamp should turn off after

a few driving trips. If the lamp does

not turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to

the dealer.

2-12 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stop blinking

and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected

by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Slip indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction con-

trol system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road

conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If

this happens, adjust your driving accordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when you

turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is

operational. If the light does not come on or does

not go off, have the traction control system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction control system off

indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the traction

control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-

cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re-

start the engine and the system will operate nor-

mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when you

turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction

control system (TCS) is operational. If the light

stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-

tor light while you are driving, have the traction

control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating,

you might feel slight vibration or hear the system

working when starting the vehicle or accelerat-

ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle dynamic control off

indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicle

dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is

not operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again

or restart the engine and the system will operate

normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on

when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.

The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

Instruments and controls 2-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic

control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-

erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the

system working when starting the vehicle or ac-

celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The front disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a front brake pad requires re-

placement, it makes a high pitched scraping

sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or

not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the

brakes checked as soon as possible if the warn-

ing sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove

the key and take it with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a

chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if

the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-

ing the vehicle.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

●Vehicle security system

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System—NVIS

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors

or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,

and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-14 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Security indicator light (Vehicle secu-

rity system)

The security indicator light s

1is located on the

instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light shows the status of

the vehicle security system.

The light operates whenever the ignition switch is

in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position.

The vehicle security system has four phases. For

each phase the operation of the security indicator

light is different.

How to arm the vehicle security sys-

tem

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the key,

power door lock switch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

●Push the button on the keyfob.

All doors lock. The hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once to indicate

all doors are locked.

●When the button is pushed with

all doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to

“Personalized settings menu”(vehicles with-

out navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic

systems” (vehicles with navigation system)

in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner

and audio systems” section later in this

manual.

WIC0754

LIC0053

Instruments and controls 2-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light

comes on. The SECURITY light stays on for

about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-

tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-

onds the vehicle security system automati-

cally shifts into the armed phase. The

SECURITY light begins to flash once every 3

seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm

time period, the door is unlocked by the key

or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to

ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

●If the key is turned slowly when locking

the door, the system may not arm. Fur-

thermore, if the key is turned beyond

the vertical position toward the unlock

position to remove the key, the system

may be disarmed when the key is re-

moved. If the indicator light fails to

glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door

once and lock it again.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors and trunk lid closed

and locked with the ignition key in the

OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

a door with the key, or by pressing the

button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening the door or trunk lid without using

the key or keyfob (even if the door is un-

locked by releasing the door inside lock

switch)

●opening the trunk lid by operating the interior

trunk lid release.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the

key, or by pressing the button on the key-

fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)

will not allow the engine to start without the use of

a registered NVIS key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered NVIS

key (for example, when interference is caused by

another NVIS key, an automated toll road device

or automatic payment device on the key ring),

restart the engine using the following proce-

dures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec-

onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered NVIS key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered NVIS key on a

separate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC

Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

2-16 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT

ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-

TURER FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID

THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE

THE EQUIPMENT. Security indicator light (NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System)

The security indicator light s

1is located on the

instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks every 3 sec-

onds whenever the ignition switch is in the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi-

cates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(NVIS) is operational.

If the NVIS is malfunctioning, the light will remain

on while the ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for

NVIS service as soon as possible. Please

bring all NVIS keys that you have when

visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

WIC0754

Instruments and controls 2-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward s

(Slower) or s

B(Faster). Also, the intermit-

tent operation speed varies in accordance

with the vehicle speed. (For example, when

the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent

operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the driving

speed dependent intermittent wiper func-

tion. Refer to “Personalized settings

menu” (vehicles without navigation sys-

tem) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-

hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis-

play screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems”section later in this manual.

2Low — continuous low speed operation

3High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s

4to have one sweep opera-

tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the reser-

voir tank is empty.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

2-18 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top few rows of wires on the rear win-

dow are not part of the rear window de-

froster system. These wires make up the

antenna for the audio system.

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so

equipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

●When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xe-

non headlights replaced at a NISSAN

dealer.

●Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional head-

lights. If they are not correctly aimed,

they might temporarily blind an oncom-

ing driver or the driver ahead of you and

cause a serious accident. If headlights

are not aimed correctly, immediately

take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer

and have the headlights adjusted

correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its

brightness or color varies slightly. However, the

color and brightness will soon stabilize.

●The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off opera-

tion. It is generally desirable not to turn

off the headlights for short intervals

LIC0388

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

(for example, when the vehicle stops at

a traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon head-

lights is not reduced.

●If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start blink-

ing, or the color of the light will be-

come reddish. If one or more of the

above signs appear, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

2When turning the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running

to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically. The

autolight system can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after

you turn the key to OFF and all doors are

closed.

LIC0560 LIC0561

2-20 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the

time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-

justed. See “Personalized settings menu”

(vehicles without navigation system) or

“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with

navigation system) in the “Display screen,

heater, air conditioner and audio systems”

section later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-

tion s

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is

opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor s

1located in the top

side of the instrument panel. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the key in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward. The high beam lights come on

and the light illuminates.

2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the

headlight switch is in the or posi-

tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

LIC0424 LIC0562

Instruments and controls 2-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights oper-

ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position

or in the position. Turn the headlight switch

to the AUTO or position for headlight illu-

mination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch

is turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-

tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates when

the headlight control switch is in the

AUTO, or position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-

ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjust

the brightness when the headlights or parking

lights are off.

LIC0392

2-22 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where the indicator light

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch

to the position, then turn the fog light

switch to the position. To turn them off,

turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

CORNERING LIGHT

The cornering light provides additional illumina-

tion toward the turning direction. The cornering

light will illuminate on the turning direction side

when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

LIC0563 LIC0393 AIC0102

Instruments and controls 2-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air bag

system may result in serious personal

injury.

LIC0394 LIC0395

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH HORN

2-24 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in

heaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo-

cated on the center consoles.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the switch

will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

CAUTION

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by your NISSAN dealer.

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

LIC0136

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below approximately 68°F

(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),

then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-

trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS

reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.

The engine speed will be reduced even if the

accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum

engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.

The indicator will come on.

Push the “TCS OFF” switch again or restart the

engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction

control system (TCS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section.

LIC0421 LIC0451

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so

equipped) TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-26 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-

ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy-

namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and

driving” section.

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

You can route a power cord through the opening

1on the passenger compartment access panel.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. See your NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

●Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

WIC0534 Instrument panel

LIC0755

Passenger compartment

LIC0396

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●

When not in use, be sure to close the cap.

Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

This power outlet s

Acan be used with an acces-

sory cigarette lighter element. Contact your

NISSAN dealer for information.

This power outlet can also be used for powering

electrical accessories such as cellular tele-

phones.

CAUTION

●The cigarette lighter should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

Front center console

LIC0602

Rear center console (if so equipped)

LIC0397 LIC0756

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

2-28 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter.

●Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the

outlet.

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS

The seatback pockets are located on the back of

the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets

can be used to store maps.

LIC0804 LIC0016

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

●The sunglasses holder should not be

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

LIC0399 Front

LIC0400

2-30 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

To open the front cup holders, push the cup

holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and

push down until it clicks in place.

The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean-

ing.

The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down

armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center

console.

To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down

armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the

lid.

To open the cup holders on the rear center con-

sole, push the button. The cup holder lid will

open. To close, gently push the lid toward the

center.

Rear — Type A

LIC0423

Rear — Type B

LIC0402

Instruments and controls 2-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the

master key when locking s

1or unlocking s

2the

glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or

unlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

WARNING

The center console box should not be

used while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

Armrest

Push the button to elevate the armrest. To return

armrest to regular position, hold the button in and

push the armrest rearward until locked.

LIC0403 LIC0404

2-32 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Console box storage

Pull up on the lever to open the console box.

Remove the inside tray to store a large object.

The console box may be used for storage of

cellular phones. Open the access hole cover s

to route a cord to the power outlet.

REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if so

equipped)

Pull up on the lever to open the console box.

The light inside the rear center console box may

be turned on s

1and off s

2with the switch.

LIC0405 LIC0426 WIC0697

Instruments and controls 2-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

COVERED STORAGE BOX (if so

equipped)

Push the bottom center of the lid to open.

GROCERY HOOKS

The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and

can be used to hang a standard size plastic

grocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20

lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC0406 LIC0748

2-34 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CARGO NETS

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

●Be sure to secure all four hooks into the

retainers. The cargo restrained in the

net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or

the net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keep

packages in the cargo area from moving around

while the vehicle is in motion.

To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain-

ers.

To remove a cargo net, detach the net from the

retainers.

WIC0757 LIC0802

Instruments and controls 2-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch

to prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls and become

trapped in a window. Unattended chil-

dren could become involved in serious

accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the

OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door

is opened during this period of about 45 sec-

onds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Power door lock switch

2. Window lock button

3. Front passenger side

4. Right rear passenger side

5. Left rear passenger side

6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it

down. To close a window, pull the switch and

hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function

at any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger power window switch

The passenger window switch operates only the

corresponding passenger window. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down s

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up s

LIC0407 LIC0408

WINDOWS

2-36 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Rear power window switch

The rear passenger window switches open or

close only the corresponding passenger window.

To open the window, push the switch and hold it

down s

1. To close the window, pull the switch up

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only

the driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down (only

driver’s side shown) to the second detent and

release it; it need not be held. The window auto-

matically opens all the way. To stop the window,

lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic

operation, pull the switch up to the second detent

and release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

LIC0409 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Open or close the skyview roof shade by sliding it

from side to side. AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition

key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof

is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the

ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.

If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door

is opened during this period of about 45 sec-

onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, slide the switch to the OPEN

position s

1. When the roof is tilted up, it will

automatically tilt down and then open.

To close the roof, slide the switch to the CLOSE

position s

The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen

by the position of the sliding switch.

To fully open or close the roof, completely move

the switch to the open or closed position.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to the

UP position s

3. When the roof is open, it will

automatically close and then tilt up. To tilt the

sunroof down, push the tilt switch to the DOWN

position s

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after

the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-

cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality

detected. Use the following reset procedure to

return sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tilting

switch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi-

tion to fully close the lid.

2. Finally, push and hold the tilting switch for

more than 2 seconds toward the DOWN

position to reestablish the lid’s home posi-

tion.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

LIC0411 WIC0698

SKYVIEW™ ROOF SUNROOF (if so equipped)

2-38 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Auto reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic

operation when the ignition key is in the ON

position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition

key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the sunroof oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will

immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in the

sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-

ately tilt up.

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close

gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is

caught in the sunroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open sunroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the sunroof opening while the vehicle is

in motion or while the sunroof is

closing.

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the sunroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the sun-

roof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the

sunroof.

Instruments and controls 2-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from the

sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet

port.

●Do not allow children near the rear sun

shade system. They could be injured.

●Do not place objects on or near the rear

sun shade. This could cause improper

operation or damage it.

●Do not pull or push the rear sun shade.

This could cause improper operation or

damage it.

1. Arm rail

2. Screen

3. Caution label

4. Sun shade arms

The rear sun shade operates when the ignition

key is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear sun shade switches are located on the

front and rear center consoles.

To raise the screen, push the upper side of the

switch.

To lower the screen, push the lower side of the

switch.

The switch need not be held down.

CAUTION

●Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen

inlet port. Doing so may entangle these

objects in the screen when it is extend-

ing or retracting, causing improper op-

eration or damage to the screen.

●Do not push the sun shade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

screen may result.

LIC0418

REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper operation

or damage the screen.

●Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing

so may elongate the screen. Improper

operation or damage to the screen may

result.

The interior light has a three-position switch and

operates regardless of ignition switch position.

●When the switch is in the ON position s

the interior light illuminates, regardless of

door position. The light will go off after 30

minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC

or ON position.

●When the switch is in the center DOOR

position s

2, the front and rear personal

lights will illuminate under the following con-

ditions:

– Driver’s door is unlocked while the igni-

tion key is removed from the key cylinder.

Lights remain on for a maximum of 30

seconds.

– Driver’s door is opened.

Lights remain on for a maximum of 30

seconds after driver’s door is closed.

– Ignition key is removed from key cylinder.

Lights remain on for a maximum of 30

seconds.

The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the

ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and

locked.

Without sunroof

LIC0413

With sunroof

WIC0800

INTERIOR LIGHT

Instruments and controls 2-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when

doors are open.

●When the switch is in the OFF position s

the interior light does not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

NOTE:

The foot well and door step lights illumi-

nate when the driver and passenger doors

are opened regardless of the interior light

switch position. These lights will turn off

automatically after 30 minutes while doors

are open to prevent the battery from be-

coming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

FRONT

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To

turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

Console light

The console light s

1will turn on whenever the

headlights are illuminated. To turn the console

light off while the headlights are illuminated, push

the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Models without sunroof

LIC0416

Models with sunroof

WIC0801

PERSONAL LIGHTS

2-42 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

REAR

To turn on both personal reading lights, press the

switch to the position s

1. To turn the lights

off, return the switch to the center position.

To turn on a single personal reading light, press

the switch to the position s

2. To turn a

single personal reading light off, return the switch

to the center position.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-

rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of up

to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver:

●Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLinkTwill retain all program-

ming.

Once the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information refer to “Program-

ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

LIC0417

TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER

Instruments and controls 2-43

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLinkT

Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer

HomeLinkTbuttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light s

1blinks (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLinkTbutton you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

LIC0419 LIC0420

2-44 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLinkTflashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing

blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-

ing light indicates successful programming.

To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

grammed HomeLinkTbutton — releasing

when the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkTblinks

rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLinkThas picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLinkTto complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another per-

son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-

gram button located on the garage door

opener’s motor to activate the “training

mode”. This button is usually located near

the antenna wire that hangs down from the

motor. If the wire originates from under a

light lens, you will need to remove the lens to

access the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the

program button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.

Use the help of a second person for conve-

nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-

ing the garage door opener program button,

quickly and firmly press and release the

HomeLinkTbutton you’ve just programmed.

Press and release the HomeLinkTbutton up

to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkTbutton should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining

HomeLinkTbuttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed

HomeLinkTbuttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLinkTbuttons, refer to

the HomeLinkTweb site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKTFOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-

onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to

HomeLinkT, continue to press and hold the

HomeLinkTbutton (note steps2-4under “Pro-

gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-

press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly

(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-

ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-

sible damage to the garage door opener

components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKT

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver (once pro-

grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-

rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-

propriate programmed HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Instruments and controls 2-45

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLinkTdoes not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLinkTsurface.

●press and hold both the HomeLinkTand

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

●position the hand-held transmitter1-3

inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLinkTsurface. Hold the transmitter in

that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLinkTis not programmed within that

time, try holding the transmitter in another

position – keeping the indicator light in view

at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,

to clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINKTBUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver

button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkTbut-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the

hand-held transmitter1-3inches (26 - 76

mm) away from the HomeLinkTsurface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

The HomeLinkTindicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light

begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver button has

now been reprogrammed. The new device can be

activated by pushing the HomeLinkTbutton that

was just programmed. This procedure will not af-

fect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLinkTUniver-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference and (2) This de-

vice must accept any interference that may

be received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690

2-46 Instruments and controls

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS)

keys ..........................................3-2

Doors ............................................3-3

Locking with key................................3-3

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-4

Locking with power door lock switch .............3-4

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-5

Remote keyless entry system .......................3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-6

Hood ............................................3-9

Trunk lid ..........................................3-9

Opener operation...............................3-9

Secondary trunk lid release .....................3-10

Interior trunk lid release ........................3-11

Fuel filler lid......................................3-12

Opener operation..............................3-12

Fuel filler cap..................................3-12

Tilting telescopic steering column ..................3-13

Automatic operation (if so equipped).............3-13

Manual operation ..............................3-14

Sun visors .......................................3-15

Vanity mirrors .................................3-16

Mirrors ..........................................3-16

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror................3-16

Outside mirrors ...............................3-17

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-19

Memory storage function .......................3-19

Entry/exit function

(for automatic transmission model) ..............3-20

System operation..............................3-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-

der chip and chrome NISSAN brand

symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip

3. Key number plate

4. Transponder chip

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

key numbers so it is very important to keep track

of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove box

lock or rear seatback lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with

someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-

cate your existing key. As many as five NVIS keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all

NVIS keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer

for registration. This is because the registration

process will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

cess, these components will only recognize keys

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is not

given to your dealer at the time of registration will

no longer be able to start your vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which

contains an electrical transponder, to come into

contact with salt water. This could affect system

function.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally open-

ing the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral s

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks

all doors s

Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you to

open and close windows equipped with auto-

matic operation at the same time.

●To open the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

●To close the windows, turn the driver’s door

key to the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Driver’s side

LPD0181

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position s

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position s

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the

lock position s

1. When locking the door this way,

be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver or front passenger side)

to the unlock position s

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock

position with the key in the ignition and any door

open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.

This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-

dently locked inside the vehicle.

Inside lock

LPD0182

Door lock switch

LPD0183

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the

interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by

using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle

before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective

distance depends upon the conditions around

the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

●the battery is discharged

●the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the keyfob:

●Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

●Do not drop the keyfob.

●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against

another object.

●Do not place the keyfob for an extended

period in an area where temperatures

exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that key-

fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-

authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing proce-

dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

APD1010

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood, trunk lid and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. All

the doors lock. The hazard warning lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once to

indicate all doors are locked.

●When the button is pushed with all

doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-

minder that the doors are already locked.

●If a door is open and you push the

button, the doors will lock but the horn will

not beep and the hazard warning lights will

not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Person-

alized settings menu” (vehicles without naviga-

tion system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-

hicles with navigation system) in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-

tems” section later in this manual.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flash

feature with the keyfob, the display screen

will not show the current mode and cannot

be used to change the mode. Use the key-

fob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display screen control.

Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

●Only the driver’s door unlocks.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed with the ignition

key in any position except the ON position.

●The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the interior

light switch is in the center DOOR position

with the ignition key in any position except

the ON position.

LPD0209 LPD0210

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Push the button on the keyfob again within

5 seconds.

●All doors unlock.

●The hazard warning lights flash once if all

doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-

ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the

ignition and turning to the ON or START position,

locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the

interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pushed,

all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute

unless one of the following operations is per-

formed:

●Any door is opened.

●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and

the key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windows

The keyfob allows you to open windows

equipped with automatic operation simulta-

neously.

●To open the windows, press the but-

ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-

onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive

positioner memory

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive

positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory

setting.

See “Automatic driver positioner” later in this

section.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the button on the keyfob for longer

than 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk

release button on the keyfob will not operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The trunk lid will open when using the key-

fob even if the trunk lid release cancel

switch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid”

later in this section for cancel switch infor-

mation.

WPD0319

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pushing and holding the button on the

keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25

seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

●it has run for 25 seconds, or

●any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Using the interior light

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition,

locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the

interior light button to OFF.

LPD0211

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1Pull the hood lock release handle located

below the driver side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

2Push the lever at the front of the hood to the

side as illustrated with your fingertips and

raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make

sure it locks into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-

haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

LPD0184 Driver’s side

LPD0185

HOOD TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

The trunk lid opener lever is located below the

armrest of the driver’s door trim panel. To open

the trunk lid, pull the opener lever out.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid

down securely.

Cancel switch

When the cancel switch located inside the glove

box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with

the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with

the keyfob.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down

the rear seat or trunk compartment access lid (for

models with rear console), and pull the rear seat

trunk release handle s

1. To close, push the trunk

lid down securely.

LPD0186 Rear seat without center console

LPD0200

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where

they could be seriously injured. Keep the

car locked, with the rear seatback and

trunk lid securely latched when not in use,

and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides

a means of escape for children and adults in the

event they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-

nated release handle until the lock releases and

push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is

made of a material that glows in the dark after a

brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-

ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

Rear seat with center console

LPD0201 LPD0187

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel filler lid release is located on the driver’s

door. To open the fuel filler lid, push the release.

To lock, close the fuel filler lid securely.

FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder s

1while

refueling.

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the

cap a third of a turn, and wait for any

“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel

from spraying out and possibly causing

personal injury. Then remove the cap.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause the

malfunction indicator lamp to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

LPD0188 LPD0189

FUEL FILLER LID

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

●Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the lamp illuminates be-

cause the fuel filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The lamp should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the lamp

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information, see the

“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section

earlier in this manual.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt operation

Push the switch s

1to adjust the steering wheel

up or down s

2to the desired position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0235

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING

COLUMN

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Entry/Exit function

The automatic drive positioner system will make

the steering wheel move up automatically on

models equipped with automatic transmission

when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

This lets the driver get into and out of the seat

more easily. The steering wheel moves back into

position when the key is inserted into the ignition

switch.

For more information, see “Automatic drive posi-

tioner” later in this section.

Telescopic operation

Push the switch s

1to adjust the steering wheel

forward or backward s

3to the desired position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for proper

steering operation and comfort. The driv-

er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you

are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting

sideways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit back

against the seatback and as far away as

practical from the steering wheel. Always

use the seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever s

1forward and adjust the

steering wheel up or down s

2to the desired

position.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steering

wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0234

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Telescopic operation

Push the lock lever s

3down and adjust the

steering wheel forward or backward s

4to the

desired position.

Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering

wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for proper

steering operation and comfort. The driv-

er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you

are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting

sideways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit back

against the seatback and as far away as

practical from the steering wheel. Always

use the seat belts.

1To block glare from the front, swing down the

main sun visor.

2To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing the visor to the side.

3Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Store the main sun visor after storing

the extension sun visor.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

edly downward.

WPD0297

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity

mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is

open.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

MIRROR

The inside mirror will automatically dim during

nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the

headlights of trailing vehicles. Some vehicles are

also equipped with automatic anti-glare outside

mirrors. For additional information, see “Auto-

matic anti-glare outside mirrors” later in this sec-

tion.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when

starting the vehicle. The indicator light s

1will

illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature

is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

●the OFF button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the MIRROR button for inside mirrors with

compass.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

●the OFF button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the MIRROR button for inside mirrors

equipped with compass.

WPD0324 Without compass LPD0194

With compass

LPD0195

MIRRORS

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

For information on HomeLinkTUniversal Trans-

ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-

tion of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if so

equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the small switch s

1to select the right or left

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch s

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if

so equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim during

nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the

headlights of trailing vehicles.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when

starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the

automatic anti-glare inside mirror will illuminate

when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

●the OFF button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the MIRROR button for inside mirrors with

compass.

LPD0237

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

●the OFF button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the MIRROR button for inside mirrors

equipped with compass.

For information on the automatic anti-glare inside

mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare inside mirror”

earlier in this section.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Power folding outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power folding

mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can

damage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

MPA0008 LPD0196

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors (if so

equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or

de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win-

dow defogger switch to activate the heating

function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or

the heating function will automatically turn off

after approximately 15 minutes.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function (for automatic transmis-

sion model only)

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the

automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these

procedures to use the memory system.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission, set the shift selector lever to the P

(Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manual trans-

mission, place the shift lever in the N (Neu-

tral) position and set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

LPD0197

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting switch.

For additional information, see “Seats” in the

“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system”section and “Tilting tele-

scopic steering column” and “Outside mir-

rors” earlier in this section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition to

any positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come on and stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.

After the indicator light goes off, the se-

lected positions are stored in the selected

memory (1 or 2).

If memory is stored in the same memory switch,

the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memory

position

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-

tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-

onds, press the button on the keyfob.

The indicator light will blink. After the indica-

tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that

memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,

press the button on the keyfob. The driv-

er’s seat and outside mirrors will move to the

memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory is saved to the memory

switch, the keyfob must be re-linked.

Confirming memory storage

●Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not been

stored, the indicator light will come on for

approximately 0.5 seconds. When the

memory has stored the position, the indica-

tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-

onds.

●If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In

such a case, reset the desired positions

using the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK

position.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ-

ous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission, set the shift selector lever to the P

(Park) position.

For vehicles equipped with manual trans-

mission, place the shift lever in the N (Neu-

tral) position and set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column and out-

side mirrors will move to the memorized po-

sition with the indicator light flashing, and

then the light will stay on for approximately 5

seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (for

automatic transmission model)

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and steering column will automatically move

when the automatic transmission selector lever is

in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

(This feature is not available on manual transmis-

sion model.)

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering wheel will move up:

●When the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

key turned to LOCK.

●When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK

with the driver’s door open while the auto-

matic transmission selector lever is in the P

(Park) position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to

the previous position:

●When the key is inserted into the ignition

switch.

●When the driver’s door is closed with the key

turned to LOCK.

●When the key is turned from ACC to ON

while the automatic transmission selector

lever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or can-

celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the

“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems” section of this manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h).

●when any two or more of the memory

switches are simultaneously pushed while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●when the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat is turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

●when the memory switch (1 or 2) is not

pushed for at least 1 second.

●when the seat has been already moved to

the memorized position.

●when no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

The automatic drive positioner system can be

adjusted and canceled. See “Vehicle electronic

systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con-

ditioner and audio systems” section of this

manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner

and audio systems

Control panel buttons — without navigation system....4-2

Names of components ..........................4-3

How to use JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button .......4-3

How to use “PREV” button ......................4-3

How to use “TRIP” button .......................4-3

How to use “FUEL ECON” button ................4-4

Clock .........................................4-4

How to use “E/M” (English/Metric) button .........4-4

How to use (maintenance) button ..........4-5

How to use the “SETTING” button................4-5

button...................................4-6

Control panel buttons — with navigation system.......4-7

Names of the components.......................4-8

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button ..........4-8

How to use “PREV” button ......................4-8

Setting up the start-up screen ...................4-8

How to use the “TRIP” button ....................4-9

How to use the “SETTING” button...............4-11

Setting the display (Audio or HVAC display): .....4-11

button..................................4-16

Ventilators .......................................4-16

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ..............4-17

Automatic operation ...........................4-18

Manual operation ..............................4-18

Operating tips.................................4-19

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-20

Audio system ....................................4-20

Radio ........................................4-20

FM radio reception ............................4-20

AM radio reception ............................4-21

Satellite radio reception ........................4-21

Audio operation precautions ....................4-21

FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and

compact disc (CD) player (Type A)/CD

changer (Type B) ..............................4-24

CD care and cleaning..........................4-31

Steering wheel switch for audio control ..........4-32

Antenna ......................................4-33

Car phone or CB radio............................4-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from

it, stop using the system immediately

and contact your nearest NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-

trol panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the

screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to

the next function.

LHA0249

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

NAMES OF COMPONENTS

1. brightness control button (P. 4-6)

2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3)

3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-5)

5. (maintenance) button (P. 4-5)

6. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3)

7. FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4)

8. TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3)

9. E/M (English/metric) button (P. 4-4)

10. Clock adjust button (hours) (P. 4-4)

11. Clock adjust button (minutes) (P. 4-4)

To turn off the screen, push the button for

more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The

screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF

YES or NO”.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick.

Push the “ENTER” button only when the use of it

is instructed on the display.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON

Finish setup:

If you touch “PREV” button after the setup is

completed, the setup will start over.

HOW TO USE “TRIP” BUTTON

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following

modes will display on the screen.

TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) →TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST,

AVG) →OFF

TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME —

max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DIST

— mile or km) and average speed (AVG — MPH

or km/h).

To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP”

button or the “TRIP RESET” button for more

than approximately 1.5 seconds.

LHA0252

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON”

BUTTON

The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100

km) and the distance to empty (dte — mi or km)

will appear on the screen when the “FUEL

ECON” button is pushed.

Average fuel consumption (MPG or

L/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RE-

SET” or “FUEL ECON” button for more than

approximately 1.5 seconds.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For

approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles

(500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery

cables, the display will show (----).

Distance to empty (dte — mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-

ing calculated based on the amount of fuel in the

fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

When the fuel level is low, the dte display will

change to (*).

NOTE:

●If the amount of fuel added while the ignition

switch is OFF is small, the display just before

the ignition switch is turned OFF may con-

tinue to be displayed.

●When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily

change the display.

CLOCK

The digital clock displays time when the ignition

key is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time.

Readjust the time.

Adjusting the time

To adjust the time, push the “H” or “M” button

for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The

time indicator will flash.

Touch the “H” button to adjust the hour.

Touch the “M” button to adjust the minute.

To finish the adjusting, press the “PREV” button

or the screen will return to normal after 10 sec-

onds.

HOW TO USE “E/M” (English/Metric)

BUTTON

You can change the unit as follows using the

“E/M” button.

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG

Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

LHA0253

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HOW TO USE (maintenance)

BUTTON

Pushing the button will change the main-

tenance menu as follows:

ENGINE OIL →TIRE ROTATION

To reset the driving distance, push the

button or “TRIP RESET” button for more than

approximately 1.5 seconds.

To set the distance, push the joystick to left or

right.

To automatically display the Maintenance menu

(“ENGINE OIL”and “TIRE ROTATION”) when the

vehicle is driven the set distance, turn ON the

service alert key.

To turn the service alert key ON, refer to “How to

use the setting button” in this section”.

When the vehicle is driven the set distance, the

MAINTENANCE screen will be automatically dis-

played and the Maintenance menu (“ENGINE

OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will blink.

To return to the previous display after the Main-

tenance Notice message is displayed, push the

PREV button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays

each time the key is turned ON until one of the

following conditions are met:

●“MAINT” button or “TRIP RESET” button is

pushed.

●“Service alert key” is set OFF.

●the maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON

Pushing the “SETTING” button will change the

settings menu as follows:

DISPLAY ON/OFF

LANGUAGE

BEEP SET

SERVICE ALERT

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU

Display ON/OFF

To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the

“Display ON/OFF” using the joystick.

The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY

OFF YES or NO”.

If YES key is selected using the joystick, the

screen will turn off after a 2 beep sound and

approximately 1 second.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” , trip

control, air conditioner (except rear window de-

fogger button) or audio button.

Language

The language can be changed to “English” or

“Français” using the joystick.

Beep set

If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using the

joystick, the beep sound will not operate (except

some caution beep sounds).

LHA0250

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Service alert

If the service alert “ON” key is selected, the

information will be displayed when the engine oil

and the tire rotation periods reach the preset

driving distance.

Personalized settings menu

You can set the following electronic systems

operating conditions using the joystick.

Slide back DR (driver’s) seat on exit:

The driver’s seat automatically moves back and

returns to the original position for exceptional

ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock door logic:

This option allows you to select which doors will

unlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Horn chirp with remote:

This option allows you to select the horn chirp

mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK

button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the display

screen will not show the current mode. Use

the keyfob to return to the previous mode

and re-enable the display screen control.

Lamps flash with remote:

This option allows you to select the hazard indi-

cator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK or

UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Auto relock time:

This option allows you to set the length of time

before the doors lock with the auto re-lock func-

tion.

Auto headlamp sensitivity:

This option allows you to set the sensitivity of the

autolights.

Auto headlamp off delay:

This option allows you to select the length of time

before the autolights turn off.

Speed sensing wiper interval:

This option allows you to turn on or turn off the

driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-

tion.

Confirm reset settings:

This option allows you to reset all options to their

default settings.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push

the button. Pushing the button again will

change the display to DAY or NIGHT display.

Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick

right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the

“PREV” button is pushed, the display will return

to the previous display.

WARNING

●Positioning of the heating or air condi-

tioning controls and display controls

should not be done while driving in or-

der that full attention may be given to

the driving operation.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,

fire, or electrical shock.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from

it, stop using the system immediately

and contact your nearest NISSAN

dealer. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-

trol panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the

screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to

the next function.

LHA0254

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1. brightness control button (P. 4-16)

2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-8)

3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-8)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-11)

5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-9)

6. DEST button*

7. MAP button*

8. Zoom out button*

9. Zoom in button*

10. ROUTE button*

11. GUIDE VOICE button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick

and push the “ENTER” button for operation.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON

This button has two functions.

●Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you touch “PREV” button during setup, the

setup will be canceled and/or the display will

return to the previous screen.

●Finish setup.

If you touch this button after the setup is com-

pleted, the setup will start over, and the display

will return to the climate control or audio mode

and Navigation screen.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the

SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the

screen. Read the warning and select the “I

AGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) key

then push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button, the

Navigation system will not proceed to the next

step display.

If you do not touch the button or screen key for

more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or

START-UP screen, the screen will change to

TRIP screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTON

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following

modes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) →TRIP 1

(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average

Speed) →TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY (Average

Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) →MAINTE-

NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-

sure — if so equipped) →OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items

To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUEL

ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the

joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push

the “TRIP” button for more than approximately

1.5 seconds.

Maintenance items

You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation

interval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval,

select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key

using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

LHA0263 LHA0264 LHA0265

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

To set the maintenance interval, select the

“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-

stick and push the joystick to right or left.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-

set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-

TER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

automatically when set trip distance is reached,

select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-

tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-

GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-

matically displayed as shown when both of the

following conditions are met:

●the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition key is turned OFF.

●the ignition key is turned ON the next time

the vehicle will be driving.

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-

TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, press

the PREV button.

LHA0266 LHA0267 LHA0483

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays

each time the key is turned ON until one of the

following conditions are met:

●“RESET” is selected.

●“Display Maintenance and Notification” is

set OFF.

●the maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON

To adjust the various settings within the display

screen press the“SETTING” button.

After pressing the SETTING button a menu will

be shown on the display screen which will allow

you to program several functions such as the

display screen appearance, programmable fea-

tures for your vehicles electronics system and

other system settings such as your clock. To

make a selection from this mode use the joystick

and press the “ENTER” button.

SETTING THE DISPLAY (Audio or

HVAC display):

The audio or HVAC reading can be displayed at

the bottom of the screen. Choose the “Audio” or

“HVAC” (Heater and air conditioner) key to be

displayed at the bottom, by using the joystick and

pressing the ENTER button to select or deselect

the key. The setting condition will normally appear

on the screen. To return to the setting screen,

push the “SETTING” button or “PREV” button.

Display settings

The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af-

ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting

“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but-

ton.

LHA0268

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen

will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-

tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-

ing the “ENTER” button.

To set the various electronic systems operating

conditions, select the applicable item using the

joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The

indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-

nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”

button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0259 LHA0260 LHA0261

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle (au-

tomatic transmission only):

With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati-

cally moves back and returns to the original po-

sition for ease of exit and entry.

Lift steering column when exiting vehicle

(automatic transmission only):

With this option ON, the steering column auto-

matically tilts up and returns to the original posi-

tion for ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first:

This option allows you to select which doors will

unlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the horn chirp

mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or

UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the display

screen will not show the current mode. Use

the keyfob to return to the previous mode

and re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica-

tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the

LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lamp

flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will

not be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return to the previous mode and

re-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time:

This key allows you to set the length of time

before doors auto re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the

automatic headlights:

●Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlights

will take longer to come on when the head-

light sensor senses less ambient light.

●Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-

lights will come on quicker when the head-

light sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay:

This key allows you to set the length of time

before the automatic headlights turn off after

exiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off the

driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-

tion.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on using

the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-

HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default

settings.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

System settings

Language/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when

selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-

ing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG

Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using the

joystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move

the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the

“PREV” button.

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust

the clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0262 LHA0270 LHA0271

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones depending

on the current location.

●Pacific zone

●Mountain zone

●Central zone

●Eastern zone

●Atlantic zone

●Newfoundland zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen

will appear.

LHA0272 LHA0273 LHA0274

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to

the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone

has been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if any

audio button is pushed.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push

the button. Pushing the button again will

change the display to DAY or NIGHT display.

Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick

right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the

“PREV” button is pushed, the display will return

to the previous display. Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator

slides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the hollow circle to open the

ventilators or toward the solid circle to close

them.

Center

LHA0255

Side

LHA0257

VENTILATORS

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Temperature control button (driver side)

2. AUTO climate control ON button

3. (fresh air) button

4. (front defroster) button

5. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button

6. (fan speed control) button

7. MODE (manual air flow control) button

8. Temperature control button (passenger

side)

9. DUAL (passenger side tempera-

ture control) ON/OFF button

10. Rear window defroster switch

11. Air recirculation button

12. OFF button for climate control

system

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children, impaired adults,

or pets alone in your vehicle. On hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly fa-

tal injuries to people or animals.

Rear

LHA0258 LHA0247

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

●Positioning of the heater and/or air

conditioner controls should not be

done while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the

system automatically works to keep a constant

temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed

are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Push the temperature control button up or

down to set the desired temperature.

●Adjust the temperature display to about 75°

F (24° C) for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front pas-

senger side temperature using each tem-

perature control button. When the DUAL

button or passenger side temperature but-

ton is pushed, the DUAL indicator will come

on. To turn off the passenger side tempera-

ture control, push the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-

played and A/C indicator will turn off.)

2. Push the temperature control button up or

down to set the desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster button on. The in-

dicator light on the button will come on.

2. Push the temperature control button up or

down to set the desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, set the fan speed to maximum.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the AUTO button to return to the

automatic mode.

●When the front defroster button is pushed,

the air conditioner will automatically be

turned on at outside temperatures above

23°F (25°C). The air recirculate mode auto-

matically turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compartment to

further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan control button to manually

control the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate

interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light

on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when

the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

Fresh air

Push the button to draw outside air into the

passenger compartment. The indicator light on

the button will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the in-

take air, push the air recirculate or fresh air but-

ton. To return to the automatic control mode,

push the same button for about 2 seconds. The

indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh air

buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air

will be controlled automatically.

Air flow control

Pushing the MODE (manual air flow control) but-

ton selects the air outlet to:

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

To turn system off

Push the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top passen-

ger side of the instrument panel, helps the system

maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-

thing on or around this sensor.

WHA0209

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section of this

manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-

mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob

to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with

the engine not running, the key should be turned

to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 - 30

miles (40 - 48 km), with monaural (single chan-

nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo

FM. External influences may sometimes interfere

with FM station reception even if the FM station is

within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM

signal is directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a

line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same

characteristics as light. For example they will

reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter) static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may

not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait

more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building

for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary

data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and an XMTor SIRIUS™

satellite radio service subscription is active.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Cassette player

●

To maintain good quality sound, NISSAN

recommends using cassette tapes of 60

minutes or shorter in length.

LHA0099

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Cassette tapes should be removed

from the player when not in use. Store

cassettes in their protective cases and

away from direct sunlight, heat, dust,

moisture and magnetic sources.

●Direct sunlight can cause the cassette

to become deformed. The use of de-

formed cassettes may cause the cas-

sette to jam in the player.

●Do not use cassettes with labels which

are peeling and loose. If used, the label

could jam in the player.

●If a cassette has loose tape, insert a

pencil through one of the cassette

hubs and rewind the tape firmly around

the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape

jamming and wavering sound quality.

●Over a period of time, the playback

head, capstan and pinch roller may col-

lect a tape coating residue as the tape

is played. This residue accumulation

can cause weak or wavering sound,

and should be removed periodically

with a head cleaning tape. If the resi-

due is not removed periodically, the

player may need to be disassembled

for cleaning.

Compact disc (CD) player

●Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

●During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

●The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the

temperature before use.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

●CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

●CDs that are not round

●CDs with a paper label

●CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

change button

2. TUNE/REW FF button

3. PAUSE/MUTE button

4. PROG/RPT button

5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

6. PRESET A-B-C select button

7. Station select buttons (1 - 6)

8. FM-AM band select button

9. CD play button

10. TAPE play/side select button

11. SAT (satellite) radio select button*

12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-

ANCE)

13. CD insert slot

14. CD eject button

15. Cassette tape insert slot

16. Cassette tape eject button

*No satellite radio reception is available

and “NO SAT” is displayed when the

SAT button is pressed unless optional

satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTor SIRIUS™ satellite

radio service subscription is active.

Type A LHA0304

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

change button

2. TUNE/REW FF button

3. PAUSE/MUTE button

4. PROG/RPT button

5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

6. PRESET A-B-C select button

7. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)

8. FM-AM band select button

9. CD play button

10. TAPE play/side select button

11. SAT (satellite) radio select button*

12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, TREBLE, FADE and

BALANCE, SSV and NR (Dolby))

13. CD load button

14. CD insert slot

15. CD eject button

16. Cassette tape insert slot

17. Cassette tape eject button

*No satellite radio reception is available

and “NO SAT” is displayed when the

SAT button is pressed unless optional

satellite receiver and antenna are in-

stalled and an XMTor SIRIUS™ satellite

radio service subscription is active.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH

CASSETTE PLAYER AND

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(Type A)/CD CHANGER (Type B)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and an XMTor SIRIUS™

satellite radio service subscription is active.

Type B LHA0248

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Audio main operation

The tape deck employs a permalloy head which

allows for improved reproduction of high fre-

quency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by

the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Re-

duction) system. The auto loudness circuit en-

hances the low frequency range automatically in

both radio reception and tape and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON·OFF/Volume control knob while the

system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or

CD) which was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/Volume

control knob.

Turn the ON·OFF/Volume control knob to adjust

the volume.

This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume

(SSV) for audio (type B only) . The audio volume

changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-

ANCE, (SSV if so equipped and NR (Dolby)

— Type B only)):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as

follows:

BASS →TREBLE →FADE →BALANCE →

SSV (Type B only) →NR (when cassette playing,

Type B only)

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press

the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears

in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust

Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance

modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts

the sound between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode (Type B only) to OFF,

LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to right

or left.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON,

turn the Tuning knob to right or left while cassette

tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the

mark is displayed.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-

cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-

ration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until

the radio, cassette tape or CD display reappears.

Otherwise, the radio, cassette tape or CD display

will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

Display CD text:

To change the text displayed while playing a CD,

press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap-

pears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text

will change as follows:

Track number ←→ Track title ←→ Disc title ←→

Track number

Display satellite radio text:

To change the text displayed while listening to

satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis-

play Mode” appears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text

will change as follows:

Channel number ←→ Channel name ←→ Artist

←→ Title ←→ Channel number

Pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, push the

PAUSE/MUTE button.

To release the mute or pause, push the button

again.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT radio select:

Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select button

will change the band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (Satellite)

When FM-AM or SAT radio select button is

pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on when

the ON·OFF/Volume control knob is depressed

to ON.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and an XMTor SIRIUS™

satellite radio service subscription is active.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when the

FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the

compact disc or tape will automatically be turned

off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically change

from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-

ing so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button

(or ) or turn the tuning knob to right

or left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold either

the or button down for more than

1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK button ( or ) for less

than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low

to high frequencies and stop at the next broad-

casting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the or button for more than

1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station

for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during

this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the or button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT

radio to the A, B and C preset button.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the

preset select button.

2. Select the station band that you would like to

preset, either AM, FM or SAT.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1 - 6)

until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes

when the select button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS) (if so equipped):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data

information service transmitted by some radio

stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or

SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-

cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large

cities, but many stations are now considering

broadcasting RDS data.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

RDS can display:

●Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

●Station name, such as “The Groove”.

●Music or programming type such as “Clas-

sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

●Traffic reports about delays or construction.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Program type (PTY):

PTY can be used to search for a certain program

type. Certain areas have a limited number of

stations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-

mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yield

a limited number of selections.

When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more

than 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT mode, the

PTY name of the current tuned station is dis-

played. During this time if the PTY data code is

zero or the data is unreadable, the display will

show NONE.

To change the PTY:

1. Press the PROG/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE button ( or )to

chose a specific program type. Refer to the

illustration.

The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?”

SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push the

SEEK button ( or ) for less than

1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning to

the PTY station will start. If you do not push

the SEEK button within the 10 second pe-

riod, the PTY mode will be canceled.

SCAN tuning:

4. Push the or button for more

than 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY name

stations and stop at each broadcasting sta-

tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again

during this 5 second period will stop SCAN

tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that

station. If the or button is not

pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then lightly

insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The

cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the

player.

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the

cassette tape will begin to play.

LHA0275

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

Do not force the cassette tape into the

tape door. This could damage the player.

If the system is turned off by pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette

tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing

when the system is turned back on.

PLAY:

●When the TAPE button is pushed with the

system turned off and a tape already loaded,

the system will come on and the tape will

play.

●When the TAPE button is pushed with either

the radio or compact disc turned on and a

tape already loaded, the compact disc or the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

tape will play.

●When the TAPE button is pushed with a

TAPE playing, the tape will play the program

recorded on the reverse side.

REW (Rewind), FF (Fast

Forward):

Push the (rewind) button to rewind the

tape. Push the (fast forward) button to fast

forward the tape. Either the REW or FF symbol

illuminates on the display window. To stop the

REW or FF function, press the (rewind)

or (fast forward) again, or press the TAPE

button.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) REW, APS FF:

When the (APS REW) button is pushed

once for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is

playing, the program being played will start over

from the beginning. Push the (APS REW)

button several times to skip back several selec-

tions. The tape will go back the number of times

the button is pushed.

When the (APS FF) button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the

next program will start to play from the beginning.

Push the (APS FF) button several times to

skip through programs. The tape will advance the

number of times the button is pushed (up to 9

programs). Either the REW or FF symbol flashes

on the display window while searching for the

selection.

When pushing the (APS REW) or

(APS FF) button for more than 1.5 seconds, each

program will play for about 10 seconds. To stop

playing, push the button again.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-

tween selections. If there is a blank interval within

a program or there is no interval between pro-

grams, the system may not stop in the desired or

expected location.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed

while the tape is played, the tape program play is

repeated. To stop the repeat play, push the

PROG/RPT play button again.

Metal or chrome tape usage:

The cassette player will be automatically set to

high performance play when playing a metal or

chrome cassette tape.

TAPE EJECT:

When button is pushed with a tape

loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When a tape is ejected while it is being played,

the system will be turned off.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

(Type A)

CAUTION

●Do not force the compact disc into the

slot. This could damage the player.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

changer.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

If the radio or tape is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the compact disc will

play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the compact disc.

3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also be

used without an adapter.

CD button: When the CD button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will start

to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compact

disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the

tape or radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (Fast

Forward):

When the (rewind) button or (fast

forward) is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

track being played returns to its beginning. Push

several times to skip back through tracks. The

compact disc will go back the number of times

the button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

next track will start to play from its beginning.

Push several times to skip through tracks. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pushed. (When the last track on the

compact disc is skipped through, the first track

will be played.)

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for

about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push

the button.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is being played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT →1 TRACK RPT →1 DISC RDM

→ALL DISC RPT

ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeated

1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated

1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

When the button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

When button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will eject

and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc ejects and is not re-

moved, it will be pulled back into the slot to

protect it (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter

compact discs).

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded with the system on.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

(Type B)

CAUTION

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD changer/player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

changer.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button.

If the radio or tape is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the compact disc will

play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-

pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the compact disc.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOAD

button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the

loading slot by pushing the CD insert select

button (1 - 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate on the

display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button: When the CD button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will start

to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compact

disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the

tape or radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (Fast

Forward):

When the (rewind) or (fast for-

ward) button is pushed while a compact disc is

playing, the compact disc will play while rewind-

ing or fast forwarding . When the button is re-

leased, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the

track being played returns to its beginning. Push

several times to skip back through tracks. The

compact disc will go back the number of times

the button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,

the next track will start to play from its beginning.

Push several times to skip through tracks. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pushed. (When the last track on the

compact disc is skipped through, the first track

will be played.)

When pushing the or button for

more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for

about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push

the button again.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, push a

CD select button (1 - 6).

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed

while the compact disc is played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT →1 DISC RPT→1 TRACK RPT

→ALL DISC RDM →1 DISC RDM →ALL DISC

RPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will

be repeated.

1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing

will be repeated

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be

played randomly

1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-

rently playing will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

Current disc:

●Press the button. The compact disc

will be ejected. If the disc is not removed

within 15 seconds, the disc will reload (ex-

cept 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs).

Select a disc:

●Press the slot number (1 - 6) for the desired

disc, then press the button. The com-

pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not

removed within 15 seconds, the disc will

reload (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter com-

pact discs).

All discs:

●Press and hold the button for more

than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be

ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed

within 15 seconds, or the button is

pressed again during the eject sequence,

the entire disc eject sequence will be can-

celed.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will eject

and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator: The slot numbers (1 - 6) will

illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the

changer.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

●Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

LHA0049

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. POWER on/off switch

4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON

position, push the POWER switch to turn the

audio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode

in the following sequence: Preset A, Preset B,

Preset C, TAPE, CD and SAT (if so equipped).

Volume control switches

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less

than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for

more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-

ous radio station.

FF, REW (tape and CD):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less

1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip through

programs.

The automatic program search searches for the

blank intervals between selections on cassette

tapes. If there is a blank interval within a program

LHA0269

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

or there is no interval between programs, the

system may not stop in the desired or expected

location.

When playing a tape, push the tuning switch

(or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to

rewind or fast forward the tape.

To stop the FF or REW function, press the

or button for less than 1.5 seconds again.

When playing a CD in the CD changer (if so

equipped), push the tuning switch (

or ) for more than 1.5 seconds to change

between discs when multiple CDs are loaded.

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad-

versely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular telephone should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. Some juris-

dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-

phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so

full attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

●If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle before doing so.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route the

antenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—skoniecz

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-2

Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-3

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-3

Ignition switch.....................................5-4

Automatic transmission..........................5-4

Manual transmission ............................5-5

Key positions ..................................5-5

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) .........5-5

Before starting the engine ..........................5-6

Starting the engine ................................5-6

Driving the vehicle .................................5-7

Automatic transmission (if so equipped)...........5-7

Manual transmission ...........................5-11

Parking brake ....................................5-12

Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-13

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-13

Cruise control operations.......................5-13

Break-in schedule ................................5-14

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-15

Parking/parking on hills............................5-16

Power steering ...................................5-17

Brake system ....................................5-17

Brake precautions .............................5-17

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...................5-18

Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped).......5-19

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) ..................................5-20

Cold weather driving..............................5-21

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-21

Anti-freeze....................................5-21

Battery .......................................5-21

Draining of coolant water .......................5-21

Tire equipment ................................5-22

Special winter equipment.......................5-22

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-23

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gases could be

drawn into the passenger compart-

ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid

open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the trunk lid or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all

traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high

speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,

because these driving practices could cause you

to lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve-

hicle, loss of control could result in a colli-

sion with other vehicles or objects, or cause

the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss

of control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-

the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).

Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the

“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions

and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

or improperly belted person is significantly

more likely to be injured or killed than a

person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-

scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-

hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be

turned to the LOCK position and removed until

the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When removing the key from the ignition, make

sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)

position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK

position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion with the key in the ON position.

2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)

position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-

tion or when the key cannot be turned to the

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the

key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON

position.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot

moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF

position or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if the

ignition switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.

When the ignition is in the OFF position,

the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-

tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or

right while turning the key to unlock the

key cylinder.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK

position while driving. The steering wheel

will lock. This may cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle and could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH

5-4 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The ignition switch includes a device that helps

prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-

ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-

tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON

position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, then

turn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK

position while driving. The steering wheel

will lock. This may cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle and could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the

engine has started, release the key. It automati-

cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS)

will not allow the engine to start without the use of

the registered NVIS key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered NVIS

key, it may be due to interference caused by an-

other NVIS key, an automated toll road device or

automated payment device on the key ring. Restart

the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered NVIS key.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered

NVIS key on a separate key ring to avoid interfer-

ence from other devices.

WSD0058

Starting and driving 5-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake and clutch fluid, and window

washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at

least whenever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Lock all doors.

●Position seat and adjust head restraints.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot be

moved out of P (Park) and into any of

the other gear positions if the ignition

key is turned to the OFF position or if

the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift selector lever is in any of the

driving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress

the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking

the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the clutch pedal is fully de-

pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it

and then crank the engine. Release the

key and the accelerator pedal when the

engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine with your

foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-

ing the ignition key to START. Release the

key when the engine starts. If the engine

starts, but fails to run, repeat the above

procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, otherwise

the starter could be damaged.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-6 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it

off. Starting and stopping the engine over a

short period of time may make the vehicle

more difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while the vehicle is moving. This could

cause an accident.

CAUTION

●When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brake should be used for this purpose.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled to produce maximum

power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to move

the shift selector lever out of the P (Park)

position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift selector lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so

the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed

before shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved

out of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

key is removed.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the

P (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine is

not running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal injury

or property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for

any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or

any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever

cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key

cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be

removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs,

perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-

ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P

(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-

tion key to the LOCK position to remove the

key.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the se-

lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the shift selector lever into the P

(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed to move the selector

lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive

position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

LSD0071

5-8 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the

manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-

ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-

played on the position indicator in the meter.

When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift

gate, the position indicator first displays M4

(Fourth)

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5

M5 (Fifth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

M4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where engine

braking would be advantageous.

M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill

grades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly

or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or

mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep

downhill grades.

●Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M4

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts

to higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the selector lever to the 2(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

●The transmission will automatically down-

shift the gears. (For example, if you select the

3rd range, the transmission will shift down

between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

●Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D position to

return the transmission to the normal driving

mode.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of ve-

hicle damage or loss of control.

●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may shift up automatically to a

higher range than selected if the en-

gine speed is too high. When the ve-

hicle speed decreases, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down and

shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle

comes to a stop.

LSD0071

Starting and driving 5-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) position even

with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shift

lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N

(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be

locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved

if the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position while holding down the shift

lock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the

steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be

moved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-

matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is depressed,

the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-

ing stop lights could cause an accident

injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note

that the 4–speed automatic transmission will be

locked in third gear. For the 5–speed automatic

transmission, the transmission will be locked in

any of the gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. This will occur

even if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition key

OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the

key back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating con-

dition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer

check the transmission and repair it if nec-

essary.

LSD0072

5-10 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-

ing to a lower gear. This may cause a

loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This may cause clutch

damage.

●Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

●Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

●When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into

the appropriate gear, then release the clutch

slowly and smoothly.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shifter

manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear

changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before

operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not

fully depressed before the transmission is shifted,

a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage

may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,

4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according

to vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the reverse lever and then

move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping

the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then

release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch

pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road

conditions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas (less

than 4,000 ft [1219 m]) and normal accelera-

tion in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft

[1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

LSD0073

Starting and driving 5-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

For quick acceleration in high altitude areas (over

4,000 ft [1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,

use the highest gear suggested for that speed.

Always observe posted speed limits, and drive

according to the road conditions, which will en-

sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause

engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR MPH (km/h)

1st 35 (56)

2nd 57 (92)

3rd 80 (128)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the lever up s

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button and lower com-

pletely s

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

LSD0074

PARKING BRAKE

5-12 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. ON/OFF switch

4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator

light in the instrument panel then blinks to

warn the driver.

●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control main switch off and have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

●The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control main switch is turned ON

while pushing the ACCEL/RES,

COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located

on the steering wheel). To properly set the

cruise control system, use the following pro-

cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the

clutch pedal when the cruise control is set.

Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal

and turn the main switch off immediately.

Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main

switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The SET indicator light in the

instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

LSD0075

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods.

●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator

light in the instrument panel goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light

goes out.

●Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator light and SET indicator light in the

instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST

switch. The preset speed is deleted from

memory.

●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission), or move the shift selector lever to N

(Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods.

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and en-

sure the future reliability and economy of

your new vehicle. Failure to follow these

recommendations may result in short-

ened engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-14 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

●Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high

gear as soon as possible.

●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-

proper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” later in this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

automatic transmission models or in an

appropriate gear for manual transmis-

sion models. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in an accident.

Make sure the shift lever has been

pushed as far forward as it can go and

cannot be moved without depressing

the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place

the shift lever in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: s

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-16 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, especially

in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

steering will not work. Steering will be

much harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake bedding

The parking brake shoes must be “bedded down”

whenever the stopping effect of the parking

brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order

to assure the best brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual and can be performed by a NISSAN

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so

the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or

when braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel and

varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each

wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing

wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-

tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-

ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock brake system does not operate at

speeds below3-6MPH(5-10km/h). (The

speeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock brake system con-

trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.

Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve-

hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The

system detects the wheel rotation rate and elec-

tronically controls the pressure applied to each

brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom-

panied by noise usually occurs while the ABS

system is operating. Such vibration and noise

encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob-

lem, but indicates that the system is functioning

properly. However, the pulsation may indicate

that road conditions are hazardous and extra care

is required while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic

sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a

computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in

forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,

you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not

an indication of any malfunction. If the computer

senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock

brake system off and turns on the ABS brake

warning light on the instrument panel. The brake

system then operates normally, but without anti-

lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test or while

driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for

repair.

WARNING

●The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-

ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

cidents resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can help

maintain vehicle control during braking

on slippery surfaces, but remember that

the stopping distance on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with the anti-lock brake

system. Stopping distances may also

be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-

ered roads, or if you are using tire

chains. Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness. Always

maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-

sponsibility for safety of self and others

rests in the hands of the driver.

●Tire type and condition of tires may also

affect braking effectiveness.

●When replacing tires, install the speci-

fied size of tires on all four wheels.

5-18 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●When installing a spare tire, make sure

it is the proper size and type as speci-

fied on the tire placard. For tire placard

location information, refer to “Tire plac-

ard” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

●Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire

may spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control

system (TCS), sensors detect these movements

and control the braking and engine output to help

improve vehicle stability while accelerating.

●When the traction control system is operat-

ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panel

blinks.

●If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un-

der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive

carefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-

tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

●If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the and indicator lights

come on in the meter panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction control

function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like

a vehicle without the system.

WARNING

●The traction control system is designed

to help improve driving stability but

does not prevent accidents due to

abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the traction control system

may not operate properly and the

indicator light may come on.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs and bushings

are not standard equipment or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the traction con-

trol system may not operate properly

and the indicator light may come

on.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the traction control system may not op-

erate properly and the indicator

light may come on. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

●If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the traction

control system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator light may

come on.

●The traction control system is not a sub-

stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-

faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect

these movements and control the braking and

engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

●When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

system is operating, the slip indicator in the

instrument panel blinks.

●If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi-

tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your

speed and driving to these conditions. See

“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section.

●Indicator light

If malfunction occurs in the system,

the and indicator lights come

on in the instrument panel.

As long as these indicator lights are on, the

traction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic

control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch,

VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC sys-

tem will still try to transfer power from a slipping

drive wheel to one with more traction when the

VDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator will

flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will still

operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from under the hood. This is normal and

indicates that the VDC system is working prop-

erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The vehicle dynamic control system is

designed to help improve driving stabil-

ity but does not prevent accidents due

to abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful when

driving and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-20 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-

dard equipment or are extremely dete-

riorated, the vehicle dynamic control

system may not operate properly and

the vehicle dynamic control off indica-

tor light may come on.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars

and bushings are not NISSAN approved

for your vehicle or are extremely dete-

riorated the vehicle dynamic control

system may not operate properly. This

could adversely affect vehicle handling

performance, and the VDC off indicator

light may come on.

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the vehicle dynamic control system may

not operate properly and the VDC OFF

indicator light may come on. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off

indicator light may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface

●If wheels or tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-

namic control system may not operate

properly and the vehicle dynamic con-

trol off indicator light may come on.

●The vehicle dynamic control system is

not a substitute for winter tires or tire

chains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole.

ANTI-FREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.

For details, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the

‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this

manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the

‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this

manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please

consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,

size, speed rating and availability informa-

tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on

P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of the

tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size

tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If

you plan to use tire chains/cables, you

should install P225/55R17 size tires on

your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-

ing to location. Check the local laws before

installing tire chains. When installing tire

chains, make sure they are of proper size for

the tires on your vehicle and are installed

according to the chain manufacturer’s sug-

gestions. Use only SAE Class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a winter

traction device (tire chains or cables). The

minimum clearances are determined using

the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-

sioners when recommended by the tire

chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.

Loose end links of the tire chain must be

secured or removed to prevent the possibil-

ity of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do

not use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

5-22 Starting and driving

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold

temperature starting is available through a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-

grounded electrical system or two-

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be

injured by an electrical shock if you use an

ungrounded connection.

Starting and driving 5-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

5-24 Starting and driving

MEMO

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire ...........................................6-2

Changing a flat tire .............................6-2

Jump starting .....................................6-6

Push starting......................................6-8

If your vehicle overheats ............................6-9

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-10

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).........6-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R

(Reverse), or the automatic transmission

into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-

matic transmission into P (Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks s

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire

2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and

spare tire cover. Remove the jack s

1and wheel

nut wrench s

2from the tool box. Remove the

spare tire.

LCE0074 Type A

LCE0075

Type B

LCE0076

In case of emergency 6-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

CE1089

6-4 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the

correct placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the

vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-

move the wheel nuts, and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until

they are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0056

In case of emergency 6-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (s

A,s

B,s

C,s

E). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

placard affixed to the center console.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor

carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions un-

der the heading “Wheels and tires” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

6-6 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage to

the charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off

all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (s

A,s

B,s

C,s

D).

WCE0054

In case of emergency 6-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (1) to positive

(1) and negative (2) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, turn the key off and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

CAUTION

●Automatic transmission models cannot

be push-started or tow-started. At-

tempting to do so may cause transmis-

sion damage.

●Three-way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

●Never try to start the vehicle by towing

it. When the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

PUSH STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator

cap is removed, pressurized hot water

will spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P

(Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).

Open all the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to maximum

hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-

ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not

open the hood further until no steam or

coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling

fan can start at any time when the coolant

temperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN

dealer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-

tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service

operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have

the service operator carefully read the following

precautions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any unit is damaged, dollies must be

used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

ACE0511

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-10 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●Never tow automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the transmission. If it is necessary to

tow the vehicle with the rear wheels

raised always use towing dollies under

the front wheels.

●When towing automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on towing

dollies, or when towing manual trans-

mission models with the front wheels

on the ground:

●Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-

sition, and secure the steering wheel

in a straight-ahead position with a

rope or similar device. Never secure

the steering wheel by turning the ig-

nition key to the LOCK position. This

may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

●Move the gearshift lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

●When towing automatic or manual

transmission models with the rear

wheels on the ground (if you do not use

towing dollies): Always release the

parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

Front

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

ACE1001 LCE0102

In case of emergency 6-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the vehicle recovery hooks or

main structural members of the vehicle.

Otherwise, the vehicle body will be

damaged.

●Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free

a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle

tie downs or recovery hooks.

●Always pull the cable straight out from

the front or rear of the vehicle. Never

pull the vehicle at an angle.

●Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the sus-

pension, steering, brake or cooling

systems.

●Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

Rear

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

CAUTION

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the main structural members of

the vehicle.

●Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the sus-

pension, steering, brake or cooling

systems.

●Always pull the cable straight out from

the front or rear of the vehicle. Never

pull the vehicle at an angle.

●Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System

(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (reverse)

and D (drive).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D.

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

6-12 In case of emergency

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-2

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Floor mats .....................................7-4

Seat belts .....................................7-5

Corrosion protection...............................7-5

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-5

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain.

●after driving on coastal roads.

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface.

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

●If the surface does not polish easily, use a

“road tar” remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier

to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed

first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted

stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the

high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

1Push toward rear of vehicle.

2Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly

reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electri-

cal conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win-

ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not

removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

LAI0008

Appearance and care 7-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather

surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry,

soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read

the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab-

ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-

ing fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they may

damage the leather’s natural finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-

tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side

only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to

act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your ve-

hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a

grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat

by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the

floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in

the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are

properly positioned.

WAI0006

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”

in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

●Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, con-

sult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements..........................8-2

General maintenance ..............................8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2

Maintenance precautions...........................8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................8-6

Engine cooling system .............................8-7

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-7

Changing engine coolant........................8-8

Engine oil.........................................8-8

Checking engine oil level ........................8-8

Changing engine oil ............................8-9

Changing engine oil filter .......................8-10

5-speed automatic transmission fluid ...............8-11

Power steering fluid...............................8-11

Brake and clutch fluid .............................8-11

Brake fluid ....................................8-12

Clutch fluid ...................................8-12

Window washer fluid .............................8-12

Window washer fluid reservoir ..................8-12

Battery ..........................................8-13

Jump starting .................................8-14

Drive belts .......................................8-15

Spark plugs......................................8-15

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-15

Air cleaner .......................................8-16

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-16

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-19

Cleaning .....................................8-19

Replacing ....................................8-19

Parking brake and brake pedal .....................8-20

Checking parking brake ........................8-20

Checking brake pedal..........................8-20

Brake booster.................................8-21

Fuses ...........................................8-21

Engine compartment...........................8-22

Passenger compartment .......................8-24

Battery replacement ..............................8-25

Lights ...........................................8-26

Headlights....................................8-26

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-26

Wheels and tires .................................8-31

Tire pressure..................................8-31

Tire labeling...................................8-34

Types of tires..................................8-37

Tire chains....................................8-37

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with longer

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-

SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its

emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,

a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN

dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

who are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather

than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to meet

the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —

in a reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,

make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check

for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

●For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or

wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following

items with an “*” is found later in this sec-

tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not bind

or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away

from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position

mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your

vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure it has the proper

distance under it when depressed fully. Check

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates

smoothly and check that it has the proper free

travel.

Parking brake* Check that the lever has the

proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held

securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking

brake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they

operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in

every position. Check that the head restraints

move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so

equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-

ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard

steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Automatic transmission fluid level* Check

the level after putting the selector lever in P with

the engine idling at operating temperature.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-

hicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that

the brake and clutch fluid level is between the

MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.

Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances from the

underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor

pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas

where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. For manual transmission

models, move the shift lever to N (Neu-

tral). For automatic transmission mod-

els, move the selector lever to P (Park).

●Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even if

the ignition key is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the negative

battery cable before working near the

fan.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●On gasoline engine models with the

multiport fuel injection (MFI) system,

the fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

der information” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)

5. Air cleaner

6. Battery

7. Fuse/Fusible link box

8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Radiator cap

11. Fuse block

12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

13. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI0330

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-

freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze

solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.

Additional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperature

down to

Genuine

NISSAN

Long Life

Antifreeze/

Coolant or

equivalent

Demineral-

ized or dis-

tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent

with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-

freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled

water. The use of other types of coolant

solutions or coolant colors, such as or-

ange, may damage the engine cooling

system.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the

reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the

radiator when the engine is cold. If there is

insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and also add

it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

WDI0332

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks s

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark s

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill s

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

LDI0329 WDI0175

ENGINE OIL

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. See “Changing engine

oil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0216

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual for

drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench

by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove

the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket material

remaining on the mounting surface of the

engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if

necessary.

WDI0218

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

●Use only Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF.

Do not mix with other fluids.

●Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine Nissan Matic K ATF

will cause deterioration in driveability

and automatic transmission durability,

and may damage the automatic trans-

mission, which is not covered by the

NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also

described on caution labels located in the engine

compartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir

at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -

80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the

power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-

tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through

the opening.

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification

information, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid

may damage the brake and clutch sys-

tems. The use of improper fluids can dam-

age the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake

warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN

Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT

3fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added

frequently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir

(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is

below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid

up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification

information, refer to “Capacities and recom-

mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.

Add window washer fluid when the low window

washer fluid warning light comes on (if so

equipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window

washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

LDI0079 LDI0080 LDI0335

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of win-

dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any

corrosion should be washed off with a solu-

tion of baking soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames or

electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-

ated by the battery is explosive. Do not

allow battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After

touching a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

BATTERY

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver

as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

LDI0302

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Crankshaft

3. Generator

4. Air conditioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the

belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it

replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule found in the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-

gapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WDI0226 WDI0005

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, please see your

NISSAN dealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the

cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1Loosen the screw.

2Disconnect the electrical connector.

3Push down on the clips and remove the air

cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner not

only cleans the air, it stops the flame if

the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and

the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed, and be careful when working

on the engine with the air cleaner

removed.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. Refer to the

“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for

change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-

dure:

LDI0336

AIR CLEANER

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins.

Remove the glove box from the opening and

let it hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit

by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot-

tom of the cover.

NOTE:

The filter is marked “UP”with an arrow. The

end of the filter with the arrow should face

the rear of the vehicle.

3. Slide the filter into the housing.

LDI0323 LDI0324 LDI0325

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

NOTE:

Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2

supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper

tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the

hook tabs until they snap on to the housing

lip.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the small

replacement label and attach it to the glove

box lid.

LDI0157

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2Push the release tab, then move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm to remove.

3Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

WDI0194

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Be careful not to let anything get into the washer

nozzle s

A. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield washer operation. If something gets

into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small

pin s

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, pull the parking brake

lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is

out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

●7 - 8 clicks under pulling force of

44 lb (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance A

between the upper surface of the pedal and the

metal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see a

NISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depression force of

110 lb (490 N)

Automatic

Transmission

Manual

Transmission

3 1/2 in (90 mm)

or more

3 1/3 in (84 mm)

or more

WDI0337

LDI0326 WDI0229

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system

check if the brake pedal height does not

return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding

brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-

nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKE BOOSTER

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release the

brake pedal several times. When brake

pedal movement (distance of travel) remains

the same from one pedal application to the

next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the

engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about

30 seconds. The pedal height should not

change.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-

pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times. The

pedal travel distance will decrease gradually

with each depression as the vacuum is re-

leased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the

fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is

used in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They

are stored in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-

partment and passenger compartment fuse

boxes.

LDI0455

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,

the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse

pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not

affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the

fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-

hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the

underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0327

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

5. If the fuse is open s

A, replace it with a new

fuse s

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

Type A

WDI0452

Type B

LDI0456

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a known

good fuse.

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

LDI0328

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1Open the lid using a coin.

2Remove the battery.

3Install a new battery with the “+” facing

down.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

4Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then the

button two or three times to check the key-

fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

●An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

●The operational range of the keyfob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the manufacturer for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

WPD0136

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the xenon headlight bulb

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-

duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric

shock, never attempt to modify or disas-

semble. Always have your xenon head-

lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For

additional information, see “Headlight

and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-

cause the headlight assembly must be removed

from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

●Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance. Remove the

bulb from the headlight assembly just

before a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the plastic base when han-

dling the bulb. Never touch the glass

envelope. Touching the glass could sig-

nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Low beam:

Wattage: 55

Bulb no.: 9012*

High beam:

Wattage: 55

Bulb no.: 9012*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-

ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest

parts information.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly

High/low (Halogen) 55 9012

High/low (Xenon) (special) D2S

Day time running

lamp – 1156

Park/Turn 27/8 1157NA

Cornering 27 3156K

Front fog light 55 H3

Front personal/map

lights 3.4 –

Console box illumina-

tion 3.8 194

Glove box light (if so

equipped) 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 2.1 –

Step light 3.8 194

Rear personal lamps 8 –

Rear console box light 5 W5W

High-mounted stop

light 5 W5W

Trunk light 3.4 158

Rear combination light

Tail/Stop/Turn 27/5 3057K

Backup (reversing) 13 912

Sidemarker 5 168

License plate light 5 168

* Always check with the Parts Department at a

NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

LIGHTS

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Map light

2. Rear personal lights

3. Step light

4. Cornering light

5. Rear combination light

6. License plate light

7. Trunk light

8. High-mount stoplight

9. Headlamp assembly

10. Fog light

LDI0391

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp

and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing. Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing.

WDI0263 Front personal/map lights – Type A

LDI0338 Front personal/map lights – Type B

LDI0339

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing. Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing.

Use a cloth s

1to protect the housing.

Vanity mirror light WDI0340

Step light

LDI0341

Rear personal light WDI0342

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Squeeze the tabs on the connector. Pull out the

bulb.

Rear console box light

LDI0397

High-mounted stop light WDI0344

Trunk light WDI0343

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare)

often and always prior to long distance trips. The

recommended tire pressure specifications are

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label

under the 9Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure9heading. The Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label is affixed to the driver side center

pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over

potholes or other objects or if the vehicle

strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the

tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at

moderate speeds.

If the tires are used at speeds above 100 mph

(162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race

track for example), the cold tire inflation pressure

must be increased. Refer to 9Checking tire pres-

sure9later in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire infla-

tion pressure when the vehicle speed or load is

reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under in-

flation, may adversely affect tire life and

vehicle handling.

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-

denly and cause an accident.

●The vehicle weight capacity is indicated

on the Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your vehicle

may result in reduced tire life, unsafe

operating conditions due to premature

tire failure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond the

specified capacity may also result in

failure of other vehicle components.

●Before taking a long trip, or whenever

you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire

pressure gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified level.

●Increase the cold tire inflation pressure

as indicated in (Checking tire pressure(

later in this section when using the tires

specified by NISSAN above 100 MPH

(162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on

a race track for example). Failure to

increase the cold tire inflation pressure

may result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. After such use, re-

adjust tire pressure.

●Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH

(137 km/h) unless it is equipped with

high speed rated tires. Driving faster

than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in

tire failure, loss of control and possible

injury.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Tire and loading information label (for

US) (if so equipped)

1Seating capacity: The maximum number of

occupants that should be seated in the ve-

hicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See loading information in

the Technical and consumer information

section.

3Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-

nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

4Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:

Inflate the tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds. The recommended

cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer

to provide the best balance of tire wear and

vehicle handling characteristics based on

the vehicles GVWR.

5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later in this

section.

6and s

7Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped).

Type A LDI0392

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Tire and loading information label (for

US)

1Seating capacity: The maximum number of

occupants that should be seated in the ve-

hicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See loading information in

the Technical and consumer information

section.

3Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:

Inflate the tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6

km) at moderate speeds. The recommended

cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer

to provide the best balance of tire wear and

vehicle handling characteristics based on

the vehicles GVWR.

4Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-

nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

5Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if

so equipped).

Type B

LDI0434

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the

valve stem. Do not press too hard or force

the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If

the hissing of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure, reposi-

tion the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem

and compare to the specification shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air

is added, press the core of the valve stem

briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the pressure and

add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, includ-

ing the spare.

Size Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

High

Speed/

Maximum

Load

Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front

Original Tire

P225/55R17

95V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P245/45R18

96V

220 kPa,

32 PSI

260 kPa,

38 PSI

Rear

Original Tire

P225/55R17

95V

230 kPa,

33 PSI

240 kPa,

35 PSI

P245/45R18

96V

220 kPa,

32 PSI

260 kPa,

38 PSI

Spare Tire T145/80*17 420 kPa,

60 PSI

N/A

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place

standardized information on the sidewall of all

tires. This information identifies and describes

the fundamental characteristics of the tire and

also provides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN can be

used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

LDI0393 WDI0394

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9indicates the tire is designed for

passenger vehicles.

2. Three-digit number: This number gives the

width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number: This number, known as

the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The 9R9stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number: This number is the wheel

or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number: This number is

the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of

how much weight each tire can support. You

may not find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should not drive the

vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

WDI0395

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire

(example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Department Of

Transportation.9The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or right of Tire

Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifica-

tion mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and year

the tire was built. For example, the numbers

3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these

numbers are missing, then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated

fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must

indicate the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pres-

sure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed

the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilo-

grams and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always

use a tire that has the same load rating as the

factory installed tire.

6Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube

(“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

7The word ”radial”

The word 9radial9is shown if the tire has radial

structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined

throughout this section, Intended Outboard

Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a white-

wall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,

brand, and/or model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding on the other

sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing

sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

WDI0396

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on

P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of the

tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size

tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If

you plan to use tire chains/cables, you

should install P225/55R17 size tires on

your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class 9S9chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tires. Other types may

damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-

sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may

be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-

mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every

7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual for tire replacing proce-

dures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specifications at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and ad-

just the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in the tire

rotation.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

WDI0258

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically inspected

for wear, cracking, bulging or objects

caught in the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in tread

wear indicators. When the wear indica-

tors are visible, the tire(s) should be

replaced.

●Improper service of the spare tire may

result in serious personal injury. If it is

necessary to repair the spare tire, con-

tact a NISSAN dealer.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. Recommended types and

sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, ground clearance, body-to-

tire clearance, tire chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, headlight aim

and bumper height. Some of these ef-

fects may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics and/or

interference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-

fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-

cal and consumer information” section

of this manual for wheel off-set

dimensions.

WDI0259

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Do not install a deformed wheel or tire

even if it has been repaired. Such

wheels or tires could have structural

damage and could fail without warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire) (if so equipped)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at

speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use

tire chains only on the front (original)

tires.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate

than the standard tire. Replace the

spare tire as soon as the tread wear

indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2

Fuel recommendation ...........................9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ...........9-5

Recommended SAE viscosity number ............9-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations ......................9-6

Specifications.....................................9-7

Engine ........................................9-7

Wheels and tires ...............................9-8

Dimensions and weights ........................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ...................................9-9

Vehicle identification ...............................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ..........9-9

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...............................9-9

Engine serial number...........................9-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ....................9-10

Emission control information label ...............9-10

Tire placard ...................................9-11

Air conditioner specification label................9-11

Installing front license plate ........................9-11

Vehicle loading information ........................9-12

Terms ........................................9-12

Determining vehicle load capacity ...............9-12

Loading tips ..................................9-13

Towing a trailer ...................................9-13

Maximum load limits ...........................9-14

Towing load/specification chart .................9-15

Towing safety .................................9-15

Flat towing....................................9-18

Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-18

Emission control system warranty ..................9-19

Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-19

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-20

Event data recorders..............................9-21

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-22

In the event of a collision .......................9-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil *7

Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.2 • API Certification Mark *2 *3

•API grade SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3

• ILSAC grade GF-III*2 *3

Without oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

Cooling system

With reservoir 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal 8.5 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Manual transmission gear oil 2-3/8 qt 2 qt 2.2 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ Multi 75W-85 or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-

tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *4

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*8

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent*6

Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”

*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”

*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE engine oil viscosity.”

*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the auto-

matic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”

*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”

*8: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/14/04—skoniecz

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec-

ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline

with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number

(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter specifications

where it is available. Many of the automobile

manufacturers developed this specification to

improve emission system and vehicle perfor-

mance. Ask your service station manager if the

gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter

specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol

with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-

termined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●

If an oxygenate-blend other than metha-

nol blend is used, it should contain no

more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may,

however, be added up to 15%.)

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

Technical and consumer information 9-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the

condition. Failure to correct the condition

is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN

is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor-

rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. NISSAN recom-

mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con-

serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and

conserve energy. Oils which do not have the

specified quality label should not be used as they

could cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro-

leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. This

type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or

SJ and Energy Conserving II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI-

FICATION MARK, use API grade SL Energy

Conserving oil. An oil with a single designation

SL, or in combination with other categories (for

example, SL/CF) may also be used if one with the

API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. An

ILSAC grade GF-III oil can also be used.

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These

oils must, however, meet the API quality and SAE

viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-

ommended SAE viscosity number” shows the

recommended oil viscosities for the expected

ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity

other than that recommended could cause seri-

ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-

placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals”.

WTI0082

Technical and consumer information 9-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY

NUMBER

●

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE

10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the

ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

NISSAN A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-

cant will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require the

replacement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air

conditioner system.

ATI1028

9-6 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under-

side of the hood.

M/T

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11

Hot PLFR4A-11

Cold PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

17 x 7JJ

18 x 7.5JJ

Tires

P225/55R17 95V

P245/45R18 96V

Spare tire

Temporary T145/80*17

Full size 17” or 18”

Speed rating 17” H

18” V

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 193.5(4,915)

Overall width in (mm) 71.7(1,821)

Overall height in (mm) 58.3(1,480)

Front tread

17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4(1,560)

18 inch tire in (mm) 61.0(1,549)

Rear tread

17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6(1,565)

18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2(1,554)

Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2(2,824)

Gross vehicle weight

rating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S.

certification label” on the

center pillar between the

driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

9-8 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is

attached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

LTI0069 LTI0070

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER

COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M-

.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown.

This label contains valuable vehicle information,

such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and

year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Num-

ber (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

WTI0049 LTI0071 LTI0072

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

TIRE PLACARD

The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire plac-

ard. The tire placard is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed as

shown.

LTI0120 LTI0074

LTI0075

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 9-11

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag:

●License plate bracket

●License plate bracket screws x 2

●License plate screws x 2

●Screw grommets x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at

the location marks (small dimples) using a

0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the

area behind the fascia, apply only light pres-

sure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the

bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into

the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of

the grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using the

two longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to

mount the license plate to the license plate

bracket.

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the fol-

lowing terms before loading your vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle)

- vehicle weight including: standard and op-

tional equipment, fluids, emergency tools,

and spare tire assembly. This weight does

not include passengers and cargo.

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight

plus the combined weight of passengers

and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total weight (load) limit specified

for the vehicle.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-

mum weight (load) limit specified for the

front or rear axle.

DETERMINING VEHICLE LOAD

CAPACITY

The load capacity of this vehicle is determined by

weight, not by available cargo space. For ex-

ample, a luggage rack, bike carrier, cartop carrier

or similar equipment does not increase load car-

rying capacity of your vehicle.

To determine vehicle load capacity:

Vehicle weight can be determined by using a

commercial-grade scale, found at places such as

a truck stop, gravel quarry, grain elevator, or a

scrap metal recycling facility.

1. Determine the curb weight of your vehicle.

2. Compare the curb weight amount to the

GVWR specified for your vehicle to deter-

mine how much more weight your vehicle

can carry.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-12 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

3. After loading (cargo and passengers), re-

weigh your vehicle to determine if either

GVWR or GAWR for your vehicle is ex-

ceeded. If GVWR is exceeded, remove

cargo as necessary. If either the front or rear

GAWR is exceeded, shift the load or remove

cargo as necessary.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certi-

fication label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to the

GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in

loss of control and cause personal

injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten the

life of your vehicle and the tire, but can

also cause unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This may

cause a premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident and

personal injury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by the ve-

hicle’s warranty.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

ANissan Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) is

available from a NISSAN dealer. This guide in-

cludes information on trailer towing ability and the

special equipment required for proper towing.

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 9-13

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the Towing Load/Specification

Chart found later in this section. The total trailer

load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified or using

improper towing equipment could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced on very steep grades or in low traction

situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures are not covered by

NISSAN warranties. A NISSAN Trailer

Towing Guide (U.S. only) containing infor-

mation on trailer towing ability and the

special equipment required may be ob-

tained from a NISSAN dealer.

Tongue load

Keep the tongue load between9-11percent of

the total trailer load within the maximum tongue

load limits shown in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle

weight/maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification

label. The gross vehicle weight equals the com-

bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen-

gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any

other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear

gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle

weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S.

certification label.

CA0009 TI1012M

9-14 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

CHART

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION CHART

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWING

LOAD 1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUE

LOAD 100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.

A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from

your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-

hicle, to help avoid personal injury or property

damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,

rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Sway control device

Sway control devices are used to help control the

effects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and

buffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure the

sway control device is compatible with the trail-

er’s brake system.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to the

vehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum

weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of

towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the

Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this

section.

CAUTION

●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

●The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-

tem, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

●To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

hitch and/or receiver when not in use.

●After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt

holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water

or dust from entering the passenger

compartment.

●Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires

to the recommended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading Information

label.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in accor-

dance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s

specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a module/converter

that exceeds these power requirements

may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-

tain the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed. Some states or provinces have spe-

cific speed limits for vehicles that are towing

trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

●

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so,

and if your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, first block the wheels and

apply the parking brake, and then move the

transmission shift selector lever into the P

(Park) position. If you move the shift selector

lever to the P (Park) position before blocking

the wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

●When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the

transmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine over-

loading and/or overheating.

●If the engine coolant rises to an extremely

high temperature when the air conditioner

system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by

opening the windows, switching the fan

control to high and setting the temperature

control to the HOT position.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles that you do tow, do

not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide”.

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly

grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,

and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-

hicle speed. This combination will help sta-

bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●To maintain engine braking efficiency and

electrical charging performance, do not use

5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive

(automatic transmission).

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●Do not use cruise control while towing a

trailer.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50

miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When stopped in traffic for long periods of

time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, see the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission

●Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and

idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-

tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine

after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing

may cause damage to internal transmission

parts.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based

on tire wear rate when tested under controlled

conditions on specified government test courses.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100. However,

relative tire performance depends on actual driv-

ing conditions, and may vary significantly due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-18 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your ve-

hicle tires is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-

ing or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and

C. They represent a tire’s resistance to heat

build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on a specified

indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause tire material to degenerate,

reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can

lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds

to a performance level which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B rep-

resent higher levels of performance on laboratory

test wheels than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-

lished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-

rately or in combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-

placement by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 191

Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-

placement by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-

4236. You may also write to: NHTSA,

U.S. Department of Transportation,

Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only)

Technical and consumer information 9-19

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then

blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is

9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20

seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9If the

MIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9con-

dition, drive the vehicle through the following

pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If

you cannot or do not want to perform the driving

pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic con-

ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolant

temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-

low the engine to idle until the gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal oper-

ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88

km/h), then quickly release the accelerator

pedal completely and keep it released for at

least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-

utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-

lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)

position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps1-8atleast one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-

able between steps. Do not stop the engine until

step 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

9-20 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-

ers that monitor and control a number of systems

to optimize performance and help service techni-

cians with diagnosis and repair. Depending on

the equipment on your vehicle, some of the com-

puters monitor emission control systems, braking

systems and air bag systems, just to name a few.

Some data about vehicle operation may be

stored in the computers for use during servicing.

Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs.

For example, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-

mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passen-

ger may be recorded, depending on vehicle

equipment. These types of systems are some-

times called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access the

electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’s

computers (sounds are not recorded). NISSAN

and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access

some of this data; others may also have this

equipment. The data may be retrieved during

routine vehicle servicing or for special research. It

might also be accessed with the consent of the

vehicle owner or lessee, in response to a request

by law enforcement, or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Technical and consumer information 9-21

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-

cedures, this manual is the same one used by the

factory trained technicians working at NISSAN

dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN

Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service

and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-22 Technical and consumer information

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2005 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation

20770 Westwood Road

Strongsville, OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area

call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-

387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-

tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize

the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to

cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN

collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts

made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-

tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its

resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.

NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,

nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage

caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-

tection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-

necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the

end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to

minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the

windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-

genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such

built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often

show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws

that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-

ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during

the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-

tect you, so you can take action to protect your-

self.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

9-24 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

10 Index

Active head restraint ...............1-9

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-35

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact

air bag system) ...............1-42

Air bag warning light...........1-49, 2-11

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-16

Air conditioner

Air conditioner service ...........4-20

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

lubrication recommendations ........9-6

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-20

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-14

Anchor point locations .............1-27

Antenna .....................4-33

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .........5-18

Anti-lock brake warning light ..........2-9

Armrests .....................1-7

Audible reminders................2-14

Audio system ..................4-20

AM-FM radio with cassette player .....4-27

Cassette player ...............4-27

Compact Disc (CD) changer .......4-30

Compact disc (CD) player .........4-28

FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and

compact disc (CD) changer ........4-24

FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and

compact disc (CD) player .........4-24

Radio ....................4-20

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-32

Autolight switch .................2-20

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner .........3-19

Automatic power window switch .....2-37

Driving with automatic transmission.....5-7

Transmission selector lever lock release .5-10

Battery ......................8-13

Charge warning light ............2-10

Battery replacement

(See remote keyless entry system) ......8-25

Before starting the engine ............5-6

Belts (See drive belts) .............8-15

Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......5-18

Brake booster ................8-21

Brake fluid ..................8-11

Brake light (See stop light).........8-26

Brake pedal .................8-20

Brake system ................5-17

Brake warning light .............2-10

Brake wear indicators ........2-14, 8-21

Parking brake check ............8-20

Parking brake operation ..........5-12

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21

Break-in schedule................5-14

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-22

Brightness/Contrast button........4-6, 4-16

Control panel buttons .........4-6, 4-16

Bulb check/instrument panel ..........2-9

Bulb replacement ................8-26

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants

. .9-2

Car phone or CB radio .............4-33

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12

Cassette player (See audio system)......4-27

CD care and cleaning .............4-31

CD changer (See audio system)........4-30

CD player (See audio system) .........4-28

Check engine indicator light

(See malfunction indicator lamp) .......2-12

Child restraint with top tether strap ......1-26

Child restraints .......1-12, 1-13, 1-18, 1-25

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-18, 1-31

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27

Child safety rear door lock............3-5

Chimes, audible reminders...........2-14

Cigarette lighter.................2-28

Cleaning exterior and interior ..........7-2

Clock

(models with navigation system) ......4-14

(models without navigation system).....4-4

Clock set

Control panel buttons .........4-4, 4-14

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Clutch

Clutch fluid .................8-12

Cold weather driving ..............5-21

Compact disc (CD) player ...........4-28

Compass display .................2-6

Console box...................2-32

Control panel buttons

With navigation system ...........4-7

Without navigation system..........4-2

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel) ......4-32

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine coolant ..........8-8

Checking engine coolant level........8-7

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Cornering light .................2-23

Corrosion protection ...............7-5

Cruise control ..................5-13

Cup holders ...................2-30

Daytime running light system

(Canada only) ..................2-22

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ....................2-19

Dimensions and weights .............9-8

Display controls

(see control panel buttons).........4-2, 4-7

Door locks ....................3-3

Door open warning light ............2-10

Drive belts ....................8-15

Drive positioner, Automatic...........3-19

Driving

Cold weather driving ............5-21

Driving with automatic transmission.....5-7

Driving with manual transmission .....5-11

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Economy - fuel .................5-15

Emission control information label .......9-10

Emission control system warranty .......9-19

Engine

Before starting the engine ..........5-6

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine coolant ..........8-8

Changing engine oil .............8-9

Changing engine oil filter..........8-10

Checking engine coolant level........8-7

Checking engine oil level ..........8-8

Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Engine cooling system ............8-7

Engine oil ...................8-8

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Engine serial number ............9-10

Engine specifications.............9-7

Starting the engine ..............5-6

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant

temperature high warning light.........2-10

English/Metric button ...........4-4, 4-14

Control panel buttons .........4-4, 4-14

ENTER button .............4-2, 4-3, 4-7

Enter button

Control panel buttons .......4-2, 4-3, 4-7

Event data recorders ..............9-21

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........5-2

Eyeglass case..................2-30

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch)......2-24

Flat tire ......................6-2

Floor mat positioning aid.............7-4

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-11

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Clutch fluid .................8-12

Engine coolant ................8-7

Engine oil ...................8-8

Power steering fluid.............8-11

Window washer fluid ............8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10

Fog light switch .................2-23

Folding rear seat .................1-6

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) .....1-42

Front seats ....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Fuel economy ................5-15

Fuel filler cap ................3-12

Fuel filler lid .................3-12

Fuel filler lid and cap ............3-12

Fuel gauge ..................2-6

Fuel octane rating ..............9-4

10-2

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Fuel recommendation ............9-3

FUEL ECON button ............4-4, 4-9

Fuel Econ button

Control panel buttons..........4-4, 4-9

Fuses ......................8-21

Fusible links ...................8-23

Garage door opener, HomeLinkTUniversal

Transceiver ...................2-43

Gascap.....................3-12

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Fuel gauge ..................2-6

Odometer ...................2-4

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-5

Trip odometer .................2-4

General maintenance ..............8-2

Glove box ....................2-32

Glove box lock .................2-32

Grocery hooks .................2-34

Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-24

Head restraints ..................1-8

Active head restraint .............1-9

Headlight and turn signal switch........2-19

Heated seats ..................2-25

Heated steering wheel .............2-26

Heater

Heater operation ..............4-18

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver .......2-43

Hood release ...................3-9

Horn .......................2-24

Ignition switch ..................5-4

Immobilizer system..........2-16, 3-2, 5-5

Important vehicle information label.......9-10

In-cabin microfilter ...............8-16

Increasing fuel economy ............5-15

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).....................2-9

Instrument brightness control .........2-22

Instrument panel .................2-2

Interior light ...................2-41

Interior trunk lid release.............3-11

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-25

Jump starting ...................6-6

Key ........................3-2

Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry

system) ......................3-5

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....9-11

Emission control information label .....9-10

Engine serial number ............9-10

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-49

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System......................1-25

License plate

Installing the license plate .........9-11

Light

Air bag warning light.........1-49, 2-11

Brake light (See stop light).........8-26

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-9

Bulb replacement ..............8-26

Charge warning light ............2-10

Cornering light ...............2-23

Fog light switch ...............2-23

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-19

Interior light .................2-41

Light bulbs..................8-26

Low washer fluid warning light.......2-11

Passenger air bag and status light.....1-43

Personal lights ...............2-42

Security indicator light ...........1-43

Trunk light ..................2-43

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-9

Lock

Child safety rear door lock..........3-5

Door locks ..................3-3

Glove box lock ...............2-32

10-3

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Power door locks...............3-4

Trunk lid lock opener lever ..........3-9

Low fuel warning light .............2-11

Low washer fluid warning light.........2-11

Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

Maint (maintenance) button

Control panel buttons..........4-5, 4-9

Maint (Maintenance) button, control panel

display ....................4-5, 4-9

Maintenance

General maintenance ............8-2

Inside the vehicle ...............8-3

Maintenance precautions ..........8-5

Outside the vehicle..............8-2

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-17

Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)........2-12

Manual front seat adjustment ..........1-2

Map pocket ...................2-29

Meters and gauges................2-3

Instrument brightness control .......2-22

Mirror

Outside mirror control ...........3-17

Outside mirrors ...............3-17

Vanity mirror .................3-16

Multi-remote control system

(See remote keyless entry system) .......3-5

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) . .2-16,

3-2, 5-5

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) .....9-4

Odometer .....................2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants.................9-2

Changing engine oil .............8-9

Changing engine oil filter..........8-10

Checking engine oil level ..........8-8

Engine oil ...................8-8

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant

temperature high warning light.......2-10

Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5

Outside mirror control .............3-17

Outside mirrors .................3-17

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats ...........6-9

Owner’s manual order form ..........9-22

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information....................9-22

Parking

Parking brake check ............8-20

Parking brake operation ..........5-12

Parking/parking on hills...........5-16

Personal lights .................2-42

Power

Power door locks...............3-4

Power outlet.................2-27

Power rear windows ............2-37

Power steering fluid.............8-11

Power steering system ...........5-17

Power windows ...............2-36

Rear power windows ............2-37

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ..........8-5

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-18, 1-31

Precautions on seat belt usage ......1-10

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-35

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

PREV button.................4-3, 4-8

Prev button

Control panel buttons..........4-3, 4-8

Programmable features .......4-8, 4-5, 4-11

Push starting ...................6-8

Radio

AM-FM radio with cassette player .....4-27

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-33

Compact Disc (CD) changer .......4-30

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-32

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test........................9-20

Rear power windows ..............2-37

Rear seat .....................1-6

Rear sun shade .................2-40

10-4

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ......................2-19

Recorders

Event data ..................9-21

Refrigerant recommendation ..........9-6

Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9

Remote keyless entry system ..........3-5

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......9-19

Safety

Child safety rear door lock..........3-5

Child seat belts ...........1-18, 1-31

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-19

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2

Front power seat adjustment ........1-4

Seat belt

Child safety .................1-12

Infants and small children .........1-13

Injured Person................1-14

Larger children ...............1-13

Precautions on seat belt usage ......1-10

Pregnant women ..............1-14

Seat belt extenders .............1-17

Seat belt maintenance ...........1-17

Seat belts ..................1-10

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-16

Three-point type with retractor.......1-14

Seat belt warning light .............2-11

Seatback pockets................2-29

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

Automatic drive positioner .........3-19

Front seats ..................1-2

Heated seats ................2-25

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-2

Rear seat ...................1-6

Security indicator light .............1-43

Security system (Nissan vehicle immobilizer

system), engine start.........2-16, 3-2, 5-5

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21

Service manual order form ...........9-22

Servicing air conditioner ............4-20

Setting button

SETTING button............4-5, 4-11

Shift lock release ................5-10

Shifting

Automatic transmission ...........5-8

Manual transmission ............5-11

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-16

Spark plug replacement ............8-15

Speedometer ...................2-4

SRS warning label ...............1-49

Starting

Before starting the engine ..........5-6

Jump starting .................6-6

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Push starting .................6-8

Starting the engine ..............5-6

Startup Screen

Control panel buttons ............4-8

Startup screen display ..............4-8

Steering

Heated steering wheel ...........2-26

Power steering fluid.............8-11

Power steering system ...........5-17

Steering wheel audio control switch......4-32

Stop light ....................8-26

Storage .....................2-29

Sun visors ....................3-15

Sunglasses case ................2-30

Sunglasses holder ...............2-30

Sunroof .....................2-38

Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-49, 2-11

Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-42

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels.......1-49

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-35

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system).........1-35

Switch

Autolight switch ...............2-20

Automatic power window switch .....2-37

Fog light switch ...............2-23

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-19

Ignition switch ................5-4

Power door lock switch ...........3-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch ....................2-19

Traction control system (TCS) off

switch ....................2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch ....................2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18

Tachometer ....................2-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant

temperature high warning light.......2-10

10-5

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

Theft (Nissan vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start..............2-16, 3-2, 5-5

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

TireFlat tire ....................6-2

Spare tire................6-3, 8-40

Tire chains..................8-37

Tire placard .................9-11

Tire pressure ................8-31

Tire rotation .................8-38

Types of tires ................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading.........9-18

Wheels and tires ..............8-31

Wheel/tire size ................9-8

Tire pressure display ...............4-5

Tire rotation maintenance reminder .......4-5

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-26

Towing

Flat towing..................9-18

Tow truck towing ..............6-10

Towing load/specification chart ......9-15

Trailer towing ................9-13

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-26

Transceiver

HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver .....2-43

Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission.....5-7

Driving with manual transmission .....5-11

Selector lever lock release .........5-10

Travel (See registering your vehicle in another

country) ......................9-9

TRIP button .................4-3, 4-9

Trip button

Control panel buttons..........4-3, 4-9

Trip odometer ...................2-4

Trunk access through the rear seat .......1-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever ............3-9

Trunk light ....................2-43

Turn signal switch (See headlight and

turn signal switch) ............2-19, 2-23

Uniform tire quality grading...........9-18

Vanity mirror ...................3-16

Vehicle dimensions and weights ........9-8

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-27

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-20

Vehicle electronic system ...........4-12

Vehicle identification ...............9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number).................9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9

Vehicle loading information...........9-12

Vehicle recovery .............6-11, 6-12

Vehicle security system.............2-14

Vehicle security system

(Nissan vehicle immobilizer system),

engine start..............2-16, 3-2, 5-5

Visors ......................3-15

Warning

Air bag warning light.........1-49, 2-11

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-9

Battery charge warning light ........2-10

Brake warning light .............2-10

Door open warning light ..........2-10

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant

temperature high warning light.......2-10

Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24

Low fuel warning light ...........2-11

Low washer fluid warning light.......2-11

Passenger air bag and status light.....1-43

Seat belt warning light ...........2-11

Vehicle security system...........2-14

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-49

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-9

Warning lights ..................2-9

Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

Wheels and tires ................8-31

Wheel/tire size ..................9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ..................9-9

Window washer fluid ..............8-12

Windows

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-37

Power rear windows ............2-37

Power windows ...............2-36

Rear power windows ............2-37

Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-18

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-18

Wiper blades ................8-19

10-6

ZREVIEW COPY—

2005 Maxima (max)

Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)

09/01/04—tbrooks

MEMO

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved performance, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of unleaded premium gasoline

with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number

(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical

and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:

●API Certification Mark

●API grade SL, Energy Conserving

●ILSAC grade GF-III

●5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:

See tire placard.

2005 Nissan Maxima Owner Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation